2008 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ...... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ...... 4-1 Front Seats ...... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ...... 4-2 Rear Seats ...... 1-12 Towing ...... 4-27 Safety Belts ...... 1-18 Service and Appearance Care ...... 5-1 Child Restraints ...... 1-39 Service ...... 5-3 Airbag System ...... 1-64 Fuel ...... 5-5 Restraint System Check ...... 1-80 Checking Things Under the Hood ...... 5-11 Features and Controls ...... 2-1 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-43 Keys ...... 2-3 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-44 Doors and Locks ...... 2-10 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-45 Windows ...... 2-18 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 5-48 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-21 Tires ...... 5-49 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ...... 2-25 Appearance Care ...... 5-100 Mirrors ...... 2-39 Vehicle Identification ...... 5-109 Object Detection Systems ...... 2-44 Electrical System ...... 5-110 OnStar® System ...... 2-47 Capacities and Specifications ...... 5-120 Universal Home Remote System ...... 2-50 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1 Storage Areas ...... 2-55 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-2 Sunroof ...... 2-60 Customer Assistance Information ...... 7-1 Instrument Panel ...... 3-1 Customer Assistance and Information ...... 7-2 Instrument Panel Overview ...... 3-4 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 7-15 Climate Controls ...... 3-23 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ...... 7-18 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ...... 3-37 Index ...... 1 Driver Information Center (DIC) ...... 3-54 Audio System(s) ...... 3-82 Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer/retailer or from: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 1-800-551-4123 SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, and the name helminc.com OUTLOOK are registered trademarks of Saturn Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM are Propriétaires Canadiens registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français This manual includes the latest information at the auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante: time it was printed. Saturn reserves the right to make Helm Incorporated changes after that time without further notice. P.O. Box 07130 This manual describes features that may or may not be Detroit, MI 48207 on your specific vehicle. 1-800-551-4123 helminc.com Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 15861573 B Second Printing © 2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved. ii Using this Manual Read this owner manual from beginning to end to learn { CAUTION: about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures and words work together to explain things. These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions. list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Safety Warnings and Symbols “Do Not,” “Do Not do this” or “Do Not let this happen.” There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning.

iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols Notices are also used in this manual. The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along Notice: These mean there is something that could with the text describing the operation or information damage your vehicle. relating to a speciﬁc component, control, message, A notice tells about something that can damage the gage, or indicator. vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats ...... 1-2 Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-48 Manual Seats ...... 1-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 (LATCH) ...... 1-49 Power Seats ...... 1-3 Securing a Child Restraint in a Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 Rear Seat Position ...... 1-57 Power Lumbar ...... 1-5 Securing a Child Restraint in the Heated Seats ...... 1-5 Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-60 Memory Seat and Mirrors ...... 1-6 Airbag System ...... 1-64 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-8 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 1-66 Head Restraints ...... 1-11 When Should an Airbag Inflate? ...... 1-69 Rear Seats ...... 1-12 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...... 1-71 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-12 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...... 1-71 Third Row Seats ...... 1-14 What Will You See After an Safety Belts ...... 1-18 Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-72 Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ...... 1-18 Passenger Sensing System ...... 1-73 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 1-23 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-78 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-32 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-38 Vehicle ...... 1-78 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-38 Restraint System Check ...... 1-80 Child Restraints ...... 1-39 Checking the Restraint Systems ...... 1-80 Older Children ...... 1-39 Replacing Restraint System Parts Infants and Young Children ...... 1-42 After a Crash ...... 1-81 Child Restraint Systems ...... 1-45

1-1 Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar. B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See Seat Height Adjuster on page 1-3. C. Manual Reclining Seatback Lever. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-8.

1-2 If your vehicle has a manual bucket seat you can adjust Power Seats the seat forward or rearward with the bar located under the front of the seat cushion. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. Seat Height Adjuster If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of the seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2 for more information. To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat, move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height. Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control. B. Power Reclining Seatback Control. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-8. C. Power Lumbar Control. See Power Lumbar on page 1-5. If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats.

1-3 Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control Manual Lumbar forward or rearward. Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your If your vehicle has this vehicle’s power seat: feature, the handle is • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire located on the inboard control up or down. side of the seatback. See Manual Seats • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by on page 1-2 for more moving the front of the control up or down. information. • Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down. Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for more information.

Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbar support. Turn the handle forward to increase lumbar support. Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

1-4 Power Lumbar Heated Seats If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are operate this feature are located on the outboard side located on the center console. To operate the heated of the seats. See Power Seats on page 1-3 for seats the engine must be running. more information. I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the • To increase lumbar support, press and hold the heated seatback. front of the control. • To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to rear of the control. turn on the heated seat and seatback. • To raise the height of the lumbar support, press The light on the button will come on to indicate that the and hold the top of the control. feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and • To lower the height of the lumbar support, press to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights above and hold the bottom of the control. the button will show the level of heat selected: three Release the control when the lower seatback reaches for high, two for medium, and one for low. the desired level of lumbar support. You may need to adjust the lumbar support whenever you change your seating position.

1-5 The passenger seat may take longer to heat up. Memory Seat and Mirrors If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front Your vehicle may have the memory package. heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5. When the key is inserted into the ignition and the ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press the desired button.

The controls for this feature are located on the driver’s door panel, and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver’s seat and outside mirrors.

1-6 To save your positions in memory, do the following: Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback enter your vehicle with the remote recall memory feature recliner and lumbar and both outside mirrors to on causes automatic seat and mirror adjustment. There is a comfortable position. no adjustment when the position has not been changed by another seating position or the easy exit feature. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-41 for more See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle information. Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and more information. recall the mirror positions. To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you time, press one of the power seat controls, memory know that the position has been stored. buttons, or power mirror buttons. A second seating and mirror position can be If something has blocked the driver’s seat while recalling programmed by repeating the above steps and a memory position, the driver’s seat recall may stop pressing button 2. working. If this happens, press the appropriate control for To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in the area that is not recalling for two seconds, after the PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2 obstruction is removed. Then try recalling the memory corresponding to the desired driving position. The position again by pressing the appropriate memory seat and outside mirrors will move to the position button. If the memory position is still not being recalled, previously stored. You will hear a single beep. see your dealer/retailer for service.

1-7 Easy Exit Seat Reclining Seatbacks The control for this feature is located on the driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2. Manual Reclining Seatbacks With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear { a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back. CAUTION: If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 and confuse you, or make you push a pedal for more information. when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s Further programming for the memory seat feature can seat only when the vehicle is not moving. be done using the DIC. You can select or cancel the following: • The automatic easy exit seat feature. • The remote memory seat recall feature. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74.

1-8 To recline the seatback, do the following: { CAUTION: 1. Lift the recline lever. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is cause injury to the person sitting there. Always locked. push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is To return the seatback to an upright position, do the locked. following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining seatback and the seatback will return to the upright seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located position. on the outboard side of the seat. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

1-9 Power Reclining Seatbacks In vehicles with seats that have power reclining { CAUTION: seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. See Power Seats on page 1-3 for more Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle information. is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you • To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their rearward. job when you are reclined like this. • To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it control forward. will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

1-10 Head Restraints Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint, press the release button, located on the head restraint post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

1-11 Rear Seats Entering and Exiting the Third Row Rear Seat Operation { CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. A. Seat Adjustment Handle. B. Reclining Seatback Strap. C. Sliding Seat Lever.

1-12 To access the third row: Returning the Seat to the Seating Position To return the second row seat to its normal seating position: 1. Remove objects on the floor behind the second row seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor. 2. Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked in place. 3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on the seatback until it is locked into place. 4. Push down on the rear of the seat cushion until it is locked in place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in front of or on the 5. Push and pull on the seatback and seat cushion to second row seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor. make sure they are locked in place 2. Move the front center console armrest completely 6. Check that the safety belt is not under the seat forward. See Center Console Storage on page 2-56 cushion. 3. Place folding armrests in the upright position. Reclining the Seatbacks 4. The safety belt must be unfastened and in the To recline the seatback: stowed position. 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the reclining 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) forward and move the seatback strap (B). seatback forward. The seat cushion will fold, and the entire seat will slide forward. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the strap to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

1-13 Folding the Rear Seat Third Row Seats To fold the second row seats: 1. Remove anything on or under the seat. { CAUTION: 2. Place the armrest in the upright position, and unfasten the safety belt. Using the third row seating position while the 3. Pull forward on the reclining seatback strap (B) and second row is folded, or pushed forward in the push down on the seatback. entry position, could cause injury in a sudden 4. If the headrest hits the front seat, slide the second stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the row seat rearward. passenger seating position. Push and pull on To return the seatback to the seating position, lift the the seat to make sure it is locked into place. upper corner of the seatback and push it rearward until it locks into place. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. The third row seats can be folded forward or removed. Adjusting the Seats Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or To adjust the second row seats, pull outward on the the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seat forward or and return them to their normal stowed position rearward to the desired position. Release the handle before folding a rear seat. and push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked.

1-14 To fold the seatback: 3. Pull up on the release 1. Remove anything on or under the seat. lever located on the back of the seat. The headrest moves forward automatically.

4. Push the seatback forward to lay ﬂat.

2. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch, using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, let the belt retract into the headliner. Stow the mini-latch in the holder located in the headliner.

1-15 To return the seatback to the seating position: 1. Raise the seatback into place by using the pullstrap { CAUTION: from the rear of the vehicle, or by pushing it into place from inside the vehicle. A safety belt that is improperly routed, not 2. The headrest must be locked into place before sitting in the seat. properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. { CAUTION: After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always 4. Reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is mini-buckle. Do not let it twist. locked. 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini-latch is secure. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

1-16 Removing the Third Row Seats Installing the Third Row Seats 1. Remove the cargo management system, if it is in 1. Before installing the seat the seatback must be the vehicle. See Cargo Management System on folded forward. See “Folding the Seatback” page 2-59. earlier in this section. 2. Remove anything on or under the seat. The seats must be placed in the proper locations for the legs to attach correctly. The wider seat must Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts be installed on the driver side and the narrower still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat on the passenger side. Remove the bolts from safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts the holes in the floor before installing the seats. and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that the front seat hooks are on the vehicle bars. 3. Fold the seatback down. See “Folding the Seatback” earlier in this section. 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the seat to make sure it is locked in place. 4. Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on each side of the seat. 4. Raise the seatback to its upright position. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 5. Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward, and into place. then pulling it out of the rear of the vehicle in one motion. 5. Push the headrest up into position. Push and pull on the headrest to make sure it is locked 6. Put the bolts back into the holes on the floor so into place. they do not get misplaced. 6. Reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let it twist.

1-17 Safety Belts { CAUTION: Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo This section of the manual describes how to use area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a safety belts properly. It also describes some things not collision, people riding in these areas are more to do with safety belts. likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle { CAUTION: that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, your This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-39 inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from it for additional information. and be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too.

1-18 In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law Why Safety Belts Work requires wearing safety belts. Here is why: When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have it goes. a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels.

1-19 Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

1-20 The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel... In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-21 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they or the safety belts! work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. still have to buckle up to get the most protection. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why That is true not only in frontal collisions, but safety belts make such good sense. especially in side and other collisions.

1-22 Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly home, why should I wear safety belts? This section is only for people of adult size. A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a Be aware that there are special things to know about crash — even one that is not your fault — you and safety belts and children. And there are different rules for your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the does not protect you from things beyond your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-39 or Infants and control, such as bad drivers. Young Children on page 1-42. Follow those rules for Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of everyone’s protection. home. And the greatest number of serious injuries It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often (65 km/h). in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Safety belts are for everyone. Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety belt, there is important information you should know.

1-23 this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the ﬂoor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,

1-24 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should ﬁt snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way.

1-25 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way.

1-26 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the buckle.

1-27 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-28 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-29 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

1-30 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to ﬁx it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-31 Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats on page 1-14 for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt 4. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt across you more slowly. Extender on page 1-38. If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled Position the release button on the buckle so that out all the way, the child restraint locking feature the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt necessary. go back all the way and start again. 5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.

1-32 To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull the stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

1-33 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Safety Belt Pretensioners The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help To move it down, push tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event. down on the button (A) and Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners move the height adjuster activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, to the desired position. and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety You can move the height belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts adjuster up by pushing up After a Crash on page 1-81. on the shoulder belt guide. Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to belt away from the neck and head. move it down without pushing the button to make sure it has locked into position.

1-34 There is a guide for each outboard passenger position driver’s side of the vehicle. To access the comfort in the second row seat and all passenger positions guide, you will ﬁrst need to move the headrest in the third row. Here is how to install a comfort guide forward by pulling on the handle behind the to the safety belt: seatback. The comfort guide will now be accessible. Pull the comfort guide out of its storage location and then return the headrest to its upright position.

Third Row Center Position Outboard Positions The elastic cord on the comfort guide is adjustable. You can make it longer or shorter by squeezing 1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from both ends of the plastic adjuster. its storage clip on the interior body. For the third row center position, locate the comfort guide which is located in a storage pocket, at the top of the seat, under the headrest on the

1-35 2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies ﬂat. edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

1-36 { CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip.

1-37 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Safety Belt Extender If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/ retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to ﬁt. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-38 Child Restraints The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt Older Children until the child passes the below fit test: • Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-32 for more information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat. • Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to Older children who have outgrown booster seats should the booster seat. wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-39 Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? { A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt CAUTION: and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face Never do this. or neck. The lap belt should ﬁt snugly below the hips, Never allow two children to wear the same just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt safety belt. The safety belt can not properly force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under one person at a time. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-32. According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.

1-40 { CAUTION:

Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-41 Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can infants and all other children. Neither the distance strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint. the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { CAUTION:

{ CAUTION: Never do this. Never hold an infant or a child while riding in Children can be seriously injured or strangled a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck child will become so heavy it is not possible to and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash leave children unattended in a vehicle and never at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant allow children to play with the safety belts. will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

1-42 CAUTION: (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.

{ CAUTION:

Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a CAUTION: (Continued)

1-43 Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? { CAUTION: A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. To reduce the risk of neck and head injury Selection of a particular restraint should take into during a crash, infants need complete support. consideration not only the child’s weight, height, This is because an infant’s neck is not fully and age but also whether or not the restraint will be developed and its head weighs so much compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, be used. an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles For most basic types of child restraints, there are into the restraint, so the crash forces can be many different models available. When purchasing distributed across the strongest part of an a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will should always be secured in rear-facing child have a label saying that it meets federal motor restraints. vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.

1-44 Child Restraint Systems { CAUTION: A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint A young child’s hip bones are still so small with the seating surface that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not against the back of remain low on the hip bones, as it should. the infant. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-45 A forward-facing child seat (B) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the ﬁt of the vehicle’s safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-46 Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be the Vehicle on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement { CAUTION: copy from the manufacturer. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can A child can be seriously injured or killed move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure in a crash if the child restraint is not properly people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s child is in it. safety belt or LATCH system, following the Securing the Child Within the Child instructions that came with that child restraint Restraint and the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint { CAUTION: must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH A child can be seriously injured or killed in a system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children crash if the child is not properly secured in (LATCH) on page 1-49 for more information. A child the child restraint. Secure the child properly can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is following the instructions that came with that not properly secured in the vehicle. child restraint.

1-47 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics, children and infants { CAUTION: are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seating position. seriously injured or killed if the right front We recommend that children and child restraints passenger airbag inflates. This is because the be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a back of the rear-facing child restraint would be child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in forward-facing child restraint can be seriously a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, injured or killed if the right front passenger using safety belts. airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing forward position. child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. CAUTION: (Continued)

1-48 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CAUTION: (Continued) Children (LATCH)

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses forward-facing child restraint in the right front anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child seat, always move the front passenger seat as restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system. far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-73 safety belts to secure the restraint, following the for additional information. instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the When securing a child restraint in a rear seating lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this using only the top tether and anchor. vehicle. In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. the child restraint properly. The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can instructions on how to use the child restraint and its move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure attachments. The following explains how to attach a people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle. any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have child is in it. lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments.

1-49 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. position that will accommodate a child restraint with The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor.

1-50 Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for i (Top Tether Anchor): use with or without the top tether being attached. Others Seating positions with top require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, tether anchors. the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to j (Lower Anchor): Seating read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. positions with two lower If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can anchors. be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Second Row — 60/40 Locations Bench i (Top Tether Anchor): i Seating positions with top (Top Tether Anchor): tether anchors. Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors.

Second Row — Bucket Third Row

1-51 To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar is located on the cover or near the anchor. The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seatback for each seating position in the second row. Open the cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

1-52 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-48 for additional information.

Third Row Seat

The third row has one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the center seatback. This anchor should be used for the center seating position only. Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.

1-53 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { CAUTION:

{ CAUTION: Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached anchor or attachment to come loose or even to anchors, the child restraint will not be able break during a crash. A child or others could to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or child could be seriously injured or killed. fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly child restraint per anchor. using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual. { CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed.

1-54 Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt the following steps: buckled. This could damage the safety belt or 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to 2.2. If the anchor is covered, ﬂip open the cover its stowed position. to expose the anchor. 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the 2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have according to your child restraint instructions lower attachments or the desired seating position and the following instructions: does not have lower anchors, secure the child If the position you are restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. using does not have a Refer to your child restraint manufacturer headrest or head restraint instructions and the instructions in this manual. and you are using a 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired single tether, route the seating position. tether over the seatback. 1.2. Recline the seatback to the full reclined position. Make sure the second row bench seatbacks are aligned at the same angle before placing the child restraint on the seat. Make sure the third row bench seatbacks are both upright before placing the child restraint on the seat. 1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat. 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.

1-55 If the position you are If the position you are using does not have a using has a ﬁxed headrest headrest or head restraint or head restraint and you and you are using a dual are using a single tether, tether, route the tether over route the tether over the the seatback. headrest or head restraint.

If the position you are 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different using has a ﬁxed headrest directions to be sure it is secure. or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint.

1-56 Securing a Child Restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be Rear Seat Position attached. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, position, study the instructions that came with the you will be using the safety belt to secure the child child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions vehicle. that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 If more than one child restraint needs to be installed for how and where to install the child restraint using in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using Restraint on page 1-48. a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for top tether anchor locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top around the restraint. The child restraint instructions tether anchor if a national or local law requires that will show you how. the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.

1-57 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock. the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

1-58 6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

1-59 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position { CAUTION: Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be Put the Restraint on page 1-48. seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing back of the rear-facing child restraint would be system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a impact airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger forward-facing child restraint can be seriously Sensing System on page 1-73 and Passenger Airbag injured or killed if the right front passenger Status Indicator on page 3-41 for more information airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in on this, including important safety information. a forward position. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing system has child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the turned off the right front passenger frontal rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. CAUTION: (Continued)

1-60 In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child CAUTION: (Continued) restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a that came with the child restraint. forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-73 seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator for additional information. on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-41. If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children around the restraint. The child restraint instructions (LATCH) on page 1-49 for top tether anchor locations. will show you how. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.

1-61 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Make sure the release button is positioned so you the retractor to set the lock. would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary.

1-62 If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. Remove any additional material from the seat such 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back child restraint. into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may ﬁnd it helpful to use your If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child knee to push down on the child restraint as you restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and tighten the belt. check with your dealer/retailer. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s directions to be sure it is secure. safety belt and let it go back all the way.

1-63 Airbag System With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim. Your vehicle has the following airbags: Airbags are designed to supplement the protection • A frontal airbag for the driver. provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury • A frontal airbag for the right front passenger. from the force of an inﬂating bag, all airbags must • A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver. inﬂate very quickly to do their job. • A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front Here are the most important things to know about the passenger. airbag system: • A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger seated directly behind the driver, and the third row { outboard passenger position. CAUTION: • A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger, You can be severely injured or killed in a crash passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger, and the third row outboard passenger if you are not wearing your safety belt — even position. if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word hitting things inside the vehicle or being AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the designed to work with safety belts, but do not middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and replace them. on the instrument panel for the right front passenger. With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door.

1-64 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:

Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in Airbags inflate with great force, faster than moderate to severe frontal and near frontal the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, crashes. They are not designed to inflate in or very close to, any airbag when it inflates rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes. can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or something hits the side of your vehicle. They leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover, position before and during a crash. Always wear or in rear crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to should sit as far back as possible while still severe crashes where something hits the side maintaining control of the vehicle. of your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover, or in a Occupants should not lean on or sleep against severe frontal impact. They are not designed to the door or side windows in seating positions inflate in rear crashes. with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety roof-rail airbags. belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

1-65 Where Are the Airbags? { CAUTION:

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-39 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-42.

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering symbol. wheel.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-40 for more information.

1-66 Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

1-67 { CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag. Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, down through any door or window opening. passengers behind the driver and right front passenger, If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. airbag will be blocked.

1-68 When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the could inflate at a different crash speed than if the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right vehicle hits a moving object. front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not airbags could inflate at a different crash speed based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the and how quickly your vehicle slows down. airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design. Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

1-69 In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system predicts For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal impact. The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-64. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags airbag should have inflated simply because of the are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold location and severity of the side impact. In a rollover level can vary with specific vehicle design. event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.

1-70 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. In a deployment event, the sensing system sends Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact and bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag evenly over the occupant’s upper body. module. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help Frontal airbag modules are located inside the contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles seating positions in the first, second, and third rows. with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag events, although no system can prevent all such modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side ejections. windows that have occupant seating positions. But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward How Does an Airbag Restrain? those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, page 1-69 for more information. even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel Airbags should never be regarded as anything more or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side than a supplement to safety belts. collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

1-71 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? { CAUTION: After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that When an airbag inflates, there may be dust some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. in the air. This dust could cause breathing Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated problems for people with a history of asthma or for some time after they deploy. Some components other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes safe to do so. If you have breathing problems an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-71. but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may or a door. If you experience breathing problems be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the following an airbag deployment, you should deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent seek medical attention. the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features.

1-72 In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, Passenger Sensing System windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for from the right front passenger airbag. the right front passenger’s position. The passenger • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for panel when you start your vehicle. the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. • The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. United States Canada See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18. The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, • Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag will be visible during the system check. If you are using systems. Improper service can mean that an remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if airbag system will not work properly. See your equipped, you may not see the system check. When the dealer/retailer for service. system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-41.

1-73 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side { CAUTION: impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be The passenger sensing system works with sensors that seriously injured or killed if the right front are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors passenger airbag inflates. This is because the are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated back of the rear-facing child restraint would be occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a should be enabled (may inflate) or not. forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger Accident statistics show that children are safer if they airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. forward position. We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing system has child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child turned off the right front passenger frontal seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag who are large enough, using safety belts. (if equipped), no system is fail-safe. No one A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the under some unusual circumstance, even rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. though the airbag(s) are off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-74 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front seat-mounted side impact airbag if: Seat Position on page 1-60. • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that • The system determines that an infant is present in the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint a rear-facing infant seat. into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline • The system determines that a small child is present the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if in a child restraint. possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust • The system determines that a small child is present the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-11. in a booster seat. Remove any additional material from the seat such as A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of • blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat the seat for a period of time. massagers before reinstalling or securing the child • The right front passenger seat is occupied by a restraint. smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child child restraints. restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and • Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag check with your dealer/retailer. system or the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system is designed to enable When the passenger sensing system has turned off the (may inﬂate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. the right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-41. sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator the airbags are active. is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following

1-75 For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the two to three minutes. This will allow the system to detect seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps that person and then enable the right front passenger’s the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag. airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.

1-76 A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, { CAUTION: seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend If the airbag readiness light in the instrument that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, equipment other than any that GM has approved for your speciﬁc vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your it means that something may be wrong with Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-78 for more the airbag system. If this ever happens, have information about modiﬁcations that can affect how the vehicle serviced promptly, because an the system operates. adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light { CAUTION: on page 3-40 for more on this, including important safety information. Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.

1-77 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your Vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places Q: Is there anything I might add to or change around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service about the vehicle that could keep the airbags manual have information about servicing your vehicle from working properly? and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s page 7-16. frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Changing or moving any parts { CAUTION: of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact turned off and the battery is disconnected, sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring an airbag can still inflate during improper can affect the operation of the airbag system. service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

1-78 In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see system for the right front passenger position, which Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-67 for includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. additional important information. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM vehicle modiﬁed. How can I ﬁnd out whether covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different this will affect my airbag system? vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could The phone numbers and addresses for Customer also interfere with the operation of the passenger Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer sensing system. This could either prevent proper Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. the passenger sensing system from properly turning In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing have information about the location of the airbag sensors, System on page 1-73. sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

1-79 Restraint System Check Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled Checking the Restraint Systems maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light Safety Belts on page 3-40 for more information. Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there anchorages are all working properly. are any opened or broken airbag covers, have Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt For the location of the airbag modules, see system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed What Makes an Airbag Inﬂate? on page 1-71. safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip See your dealer/retailer for service. apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-39 for more information. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety Belts on page 5-103.

1-80 Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH After a Crash system parts. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was { CAUTION: not being used at the time of the crash. If an airbag inﬂates, you will need to replace airbag A crash can damage the restraint systems system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system in this section. may not properly protect the person using it, Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the resulting in serious injury or even death in vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light a crash. To help make sure your restraint stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are systems are working properly after a crash, driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-40. have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts? After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced.

1-81 ✍ NOTES

1-82 Section 2 Features and Controls

Keys ...... 2-3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ...... 2-25 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ...... 2-4 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-25 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Ignition Positions ...... 2-26 Operation ...... 2-5 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...... 2-27 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-7 Starting the Engine ...... 2-27 Doors and Locks ...... 2-10 Engine Coolant Heater ...... 2-29 Door Locks ...... 2-10 Automatic Transmission Operation ...... 2-30 Power Door Locks ...... 2-11 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 2-33 Delayed Locking ...... 2-11 Parking Brake ...... 2-34 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-11 Shifting Into Park ...... 2-35 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-12 Shifting Out of Park ...... 2-36 Lockout Protection ...... 2-12 Parking Over Things That Burn ...... 2-37 Liftgate ...... 2-13 Engine Exhaust ...... 2-37 Power Liftgate ...... 2-14 Running the Vehicle While Parked ...... 2-38 Mirrors ...... 2-39 Windows ...... 2-18 ® Power Windows ...... 2-19 Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar ...... 2-39 Sun Visors ...... 2-21 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® and Compass ...... 2-39 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-21 Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-41 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-22 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ...... 2-42 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ...... 2-23 ® Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-43 PASS-Key III+ Electronic Immobilizer Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-43 Operation ...... 2-24

2-1 Section 2 Features and Controls

Object Detection Systems ...... 2-44 Center Console Storage ...... 2-56 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 2-44 Second Row Center Console ...... 2-56 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) ...... 2-46 Assist Handles ...... 2-57 OnStar® System ...... 2-47 Floor Mats ...... 2-57 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-58 Universal Home Remote System ...... 2-50 Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-58 Universal Home Remote System Operation Convenience Net ...... 2-58 (With One Triangular LED) ...... 2-51 Cargo Cover ...... 2-59 Storage Areas ...... 2-55 Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-59 Glove Box ...... 2-55 Cargo Management System ...... 2-59 Cupholders ...... 2-55 Sunroof ...... 2-60 Instrument Panel Storage ...... 2-55

2-2 Keys

{ CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition and all locks. The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. 2-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization System to use this equipment. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, radio frequency subject to Federal Communications try this: Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. • Check the distance. The transmitter may be too This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy Operation is subject to the following two conditions: or snowy weather. 1. This device may not cause interference. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the 2. This device must accept any interference received, left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and including interference that may cause undesired try again. operation of the device. Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. • Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Replacement” later in this section. 1. This device may not cause interference. • If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician 2. This device must accept any interference received, for service. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) / (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this System Operation feature, press / to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional information. will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away. However, the Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled through operating range may be less while the vehicle is running. the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps There are other conditions which can affect the will flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless through the DIC, the horn will chirp when Q is pressed Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4. again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for additional information. Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22. " (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver’s door. If " is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74. Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content With Remote Start theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on and Liftgate (Without page 2-22. Remote Start or Liftgate Similar)

2-5 & (Power Liftgate): Press and hold for about one The lost transmitter will no longer work after the new second to open and close the liftgate. The taillamps will transmitters are re-coded. The vehicle can have a ﬂash and a chime will sound to indicate when the maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. See liftgate is opening and closing. “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-54 or DIC L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will ﬂash page 3-60 for instructions on how to match RKE and the horn will sound three times. transmitters to your vehicle.

Press and hold L for more than two seconds to Battery Replacement activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will ﬂash Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for additional be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work. information. Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be re-coded to match the new transmitter.

2-6 Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch Remote Vehicle Start any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter. Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that starts the engine from outside of the vehicle. If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system and heated seats, the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Heated Seats on page 1-5 for more information. The rear window defogger and heated mirrors, if your vehicle has them, will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will turn off when the key is turned to To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter: ON/RUN. 1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a ﬂat, Laws in some communities may restrict the use of thin object inserted into the notch on the side. remote starters. For example, some laws may require a 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for 3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down. any requirements on remote starting of vehicles. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery. 4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.

2-7 If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE 3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has transmitter functions will have an increased range been driven, repeat these steps while the engine of operation. However, the range may be less while is still running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for the vehicle is running. the engine to continue to run. Remote start can be extended one time. There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional and turn the key to the ON/RUN position to drive information. the vehicle. If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off / (Remote Start): This button will be on the after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done. RKE transmitter if you have remote start. To manually shut off a remote start: To start the vehicle: • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. the remote start button until the parking lamps 2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then turn off. immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash. If you • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. cannot see the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the • Turn the ignition switch on and then off. remote start button for at least four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote start The vehicle can be started using the remote start feature button again, after the vehicle has started, will shut two separate times between driving sequences. The the vehicle off. engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn Or, you can extend the engine run time by another on and remain on while the vehicle is running. 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame, and before the engine stops.

2-8 For example, if the lock button and then the remote Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle has been running for ﬁve minutes, 10 minutes are start system enabled. The system may be enabled added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes. or disabled through the DIC if your vehicle has DIC buttons. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle The additional 10 minutes are considered a second Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for remote start. additional information. If your vehicle does not have Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to enable or disable one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be the remote start system. started with the key. Remote Start Ready After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle can be started using the remote start feature again. If your vehicle does not have the remote start feature, The vehicle cannot be started using the remote it will have the remote start ready feature. This start feature if the key is in the ignition, the hood is feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the not closed, or if there is an emission control system manufacturer’s remote start feature. malfunction. See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the Also, the engine will turn off during a remote start manufacturer’s remote start feature to your vehicle. if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low.

2-9 Doors and Locks CAUTION: (Continued)

Door Locks • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can { CAUTION: suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Outsiders can easily enter through an • Passengers, especially children, can easily unlocked door when you slow down or open the doors and fall out of a moving stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle help prevent this from happening. will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear The vehicle’s doors can be manually locked or unlocked safety belts properly and lock the doors in the following ways: whenever you drive. • From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door. CAUTION: (Continued) • From the inside, use the lock control on the door.

2-10 Power Door Locks This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. You can program this feature using the Driver The power door lock switches are located on the Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK front doors. under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and Programmable Automatic Door press to lock the doors. Locks Delayed Locking Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can When locking the doors with the power lock switch program this feature through the Driver Information and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC ﬁve seconds after the last door is closed. You will Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information on DIC hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking programming. feature is in use. Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.

2-11 Rear Door Security Locks Lockout Protection Your vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent This feature protects you from locking the key in the passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. Open the rear doors to If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed access the security locks when the driver’s door is open and the key is in on the inside edge of the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s each door. door will unlock. If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.

To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position.

2-12 Liftgate If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power Liftgate on page 2-14. To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or { CAUTION: press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5. It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can underside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle must be in come into your vehicle. You cannot see or PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate, smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid. even death. The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not electrical wiring or other cable connections open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery must pass through the seal between the body is reconnected and charged. and the liftgate: If the battery is properly connected and has adequate • Make sure all other windows are shut. voltage, and the liftgate still will not function, your vehicle • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling should be taken to a dealership for service. system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See Climate Control System in the index. • If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. • If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. See Power Liftgate on page 2-14.

2-13 Power Liftgate CAUTION: (Continued) Power Liftgate Operation • If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. { CAUTION: • If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate See Power Liftgate on page 2-14. open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. The vehicle smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and must be in PARK (P) to use the power feature. even death. The taillamps will ﬂash and a chime will sound when the If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if power liftgate is used. electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate: { CAUTION: • Make sure all other windows are shut. • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling You or others could be injured if caught in the system to its highest speed with the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is recirculation mode off. That will force no one in the way of the liftgate as it is outside air into your vehicle. See Climate opening and closing. Control System in the index. CAUTION: (Continued)

2-14 Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction. could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in the following ways: • Press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. • Pressing the liftgate button on the center console.

Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch

The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation. The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under Power Liftgate Button extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions. on Center Console If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. • Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle.

2-15 If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission cycle, the power function will deactivate, and you out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power must manually open or close the liftgate. The LIFTGATE liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the OPEN warning message in the Driver Information open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched removing the obstructions, manually open the liftgate before you drive away. to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position. The liftgate will now If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support resume normal power operation. struts have lost pressure, the lights will ﬂash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily, Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the before using the liftgate. liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor, the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully. Obstacle Detection Features The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open or open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the closed during a power cycle. liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,

2-16 Manual Operation of Power Liftgate If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights To change the liftgate will ﬂash three times, but the liftgate will not move. to manual operation, It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate press the switch on open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open, the center console the liftgate should be set to manual operation by to the OFF position. pressing the OFF switch on the center console. The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged. If the battery is properly connected with adequate voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still With the power liftgate disabled and all of the will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a doors unlocked, the liftgate can be manually dealer/retailer for service. opened and closed. To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always close the liftgate before driving.

2-17 Windows

{ CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-18 Power Windows The power window controls are located on each of the side doors. { CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path Uplevel shown, base of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a similar vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use The driver’s door also has switches that control the the window lockout button to prevent passenger and rear windows. The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY unintentional operation of the windows. or ON or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window.

2-19 Express-Down Windows Programming the Power Windows Windows that have the express-down feature allow the If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged, windows to be lowered without holding the switch. disconnected, or replaced, windows with the express-up Press the window switch fully and release it to activate feature need to be reprogrammed for this feature to the express-down feature. The express mode can work. To program the window: be canceled at any time by briefly pressing, or pulling 1. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY or ON the switch. positions, or when Retained Accessory Express-Up Window Power (RAP) is active, close all doors. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27. Windows that have the express-up feature allow the 2. Press and continue to hold the window switch until windows to be raised all the way without holding the the window is fully open. switch up. Pull the switch up fully and release it to activate the express-up feature. The express-up 3. Pull up and hold the window switch to close the mode can be canceled at any time by briefly window. Continue to hold it briefly after the pressing, or pulling the switch. window is fully closed. 4. Repeat for each window that has the express up feature.

2-20 Anti-Pinch Feature Sun Visors The anti-pinch feature is on windows with the Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the express-up feature. If an object is in the way of the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the window as it is express-closing, or in certain weather rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger conditions like severe icing, the window will stop side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side and open to a factory preset position. The window to cover the side window. It can be moved along the functions normally once the obstruction is removed. rod from side-to-side in this position also. Window Lockout Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the is located with the power window switches on the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun visor driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on. passenger windows from operating, except from the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the Theft-Deterrent Systems lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on. Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal.

2-21 Content Theft-Deterrent • Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter when the driver door is closed. Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm The security light will come on solid for system. approximately 30 seconds and then go off. The content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light goes off. If a locked door is opened without using the key in the driver’s door key cylinder or the RKE transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter To activate the theft-deterrent system, do one of the during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go following: off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then will turn off to save • Press the lock button on the Remote Keyless the battery power. Entry (RKE) transmitter when any door is open. The security light should come on and flash. When The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors the door is closed, the security light will stop are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door flashing and stay on solid and then go off after lock. It activates only if you use the power door approximately 30 seconds. The content theft lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter. deterrent alarm is not armed until the security You should also remember that you can start your light goes off. vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm will not be activated until all doors are closed and the security light goes off.

2-22 Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident: PASS-Key® III+ Electronic • If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the Immobilizer door key after the doors are closed. The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio • Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter. frequency subject to Federal Communications Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. if the system has been armed. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by Operation is subject to the following two conditions: pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, Testing the Alarm including interference that may cause undesired To test the alarm: operation. 1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. and open the driver’s door. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the 1. This device may not cause interference. RKE transmitter. 2. This device must accept any interference received, 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for including interference that may cause undesired the security light to go out. operation of the device. 4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door. This Changes or modifications to this system by other than should set off the alarm. an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle. fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-111. If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service. 2-23 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this Immobilizer Operation time, you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses

® and Circuit Breakers on page 5-111. If the engine Your vehicle has PASS-Key III+ (Personalized still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. ® service. If your vehicle does start, the ﬁrst key may be PASS-Key III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the The system is automatically armed when the key PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an is removed from the ignition. emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON/RUN. It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement key. You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The The security light will come on if there is a problem following procedure is for programming additional with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system. keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from III+ to have starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start keys made and programmed to the system. the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service number of electrical key codes. PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.

2-24 To program the new key: Starting and Operating Your 1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it. Vehicle 2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer/retailer for service. New Vehicle Break-In 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the you follow these guidelines: ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original • If you have all-wheel drive, keep your speed at key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position. 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles The security light will turn off once the key has (805 km). been programmed. • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not be programmed. make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. ® If you lose or damage your PASS-Key III+ key, see • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service ® (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake PASS-Key III+ to have a new key made. linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM message linings can mean premature wear and earlier displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. every time you get new brake linings. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a additional information. Trailer on page 4-31 for the trailer towing Do not leave the key or device that disarms or capabilities of your vehicle and more deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle. information. Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.

2-25 Ignition Positions ( (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This position locks the ignition and With the key in the ignition, transmission. If the steering wheel is locked, move it from you can turn it to four right to left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. different positions. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers while the engine is off. This position will also allow you to turn off the engine.

R (ON/RUN): This is the position that the switch returns to after you start your engine and release the key. The switch stays in ON/RUN when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use ON/RUN to operate your electrical power accessories, and to display some instrument panel In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in warning lights. ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied. The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if ignition switch could cause damage or break the the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with of time. your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. / (START): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON/RUN for normal driving.

2-26 Key In the Ignition The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened. Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close all the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime doors and turn the key to ON/RUN and then back will sound when you open the driver’s door. Always to LOCK/OFF. remember to remove your key from the ignition and take All these features will work when the key is in the it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission. ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY positions. Also, always remember to lock the doors. The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the Starting the Engine ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). extended period of time. Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a safety feature. To restart when you are already Retained Accessory Power (RAP) moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if your vehicle These vehicle accessories can be used for up to is moving. If you do, you could damage the 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off: transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when your • Audio System vehicle is stopped. • Power Windows • Sunroof (if equipped) Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.

2-27 Starting Procedure 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C), 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try ignition key to START. When the engine starts, pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as and holding it there as you hold the key in START for your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of and lubricate all moving parts. the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears System. This feature assists in starting the engine the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the and protects components. If the ignition key is turned engine immediately after starting it. Operate the to the START position, and then released when the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up engine begins cranking, the engine will continue and lubricates all moving parts. cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key is held in Notice: The engine is designed to work with the START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. or accessories, you could change the way the To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, cranking if the engine is already running. Engine check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition engine might not perform properly. Any resulting switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF damage would not be covered by the vehicle position. warranty. Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.

2-28 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold { CAUTION: weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before could cause an electrical shock. Also, the starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent and cause a ﬁre. You could be seriously engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will To Use the Engine Coolant Heater not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located on the driver’s side of the 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and engine compartment, it is routed around the store the cord as it was before to keep it away windshield washer ﬂuid reservoir. from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged. 3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

2-29 Automatic Transmission Operation Your vehicle has an electronic shift position indicator { CAUTION: within the instrument panel cluster. It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake ﬁrmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on When using the Electronic Range Select Mode a fairly level ground, always set the parking brake number will display next to the L, indicating the current and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting gear that has been selected. Into Park on page 2-35. If you are pulling a See Electronic Range Select mode in this section for trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-31. more information. Your automatic transmission has a shift lever located on Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before the console between the seats. starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You must fully PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is apply your regular brake ﬁrst and then press the shift the best position to use when you start your engine lever button before you can shift from PARK (P) when the because your vehicle cannot move easily. ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-36.

2-30 REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is the transmission. The repairs would not be covered moving forward could damage the transmission. by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. ice or sand without damaging your transmission, If you need more power for passing, and you are: see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow • Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your on page 4-21. accelerator pedal about halfway down. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not • Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the connect with the wheels. To restart when you are accelerator all the way down. already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerate slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you could damage the transmission. Have your vehicle { CAUTION: serviced right away. You can drive in LOW (L) when you are driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then. running at high speed is dangerous. Unless LOW (L): This position gives you access to gear your foot is ﬁrmly on the brake pedal, the ranges. This provides more engine braking but lower vehicle could move very rapidly. You could fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can use it on lose control and hit people or objects. Do not very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.

2-31 Electronic Range Select Mode page 3-54 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-60 for more information. The Electronic Range Selector (ERS) mode allows you to number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that the choose the top-gear limit of the vehicle’s transmission transmission will be allowed to operate in. However, and the vehicle’s speed while driving down hill or towing your vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears a trailer. as required by various driving conditions. This means To use this feature, do the following: that all gears below that number are available. For example, when FOURTH (4) is shown next to the L, 1. Move the shift lever to LOW (L). FIRST (1) through FOURTH (4) gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle. You cannot shift into FIFTH (5) 2. Press the plus/minus until the plus (+) button is used or you shift back button located on the into DRIVE (D) mode. shift lever, to increase or decrease the While in LOW (L), the transmission will prevent shifting gear range available to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high based upon your for the gear range you are trying to select. You have a current driving brief period of time to slow the vehicle speed. If conditions and needs. vehicle speed is not reduced within the timeframe allowed, the lower gear range attempted will not be available. The highest possible gear that is allowed for that engine speed will display next to the L in the DIC. Try again to slow the vehicle speed and press the minus (−) button to the desired lower gear range. Automatic Engine Grade braking is not available when When you shift from DRIVE (D) to LOW (L), the the ERS is active. It is available in DRIVE (D) for transmission will shift to a pre-determined lower gear both normal and Tow/Haul mode. While using the ERS, range. The highest gear available for this pre-determined cruise control and the tow/haul mode can be used. range is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-33 for more information. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-54 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on

2-32 Tow/Haul Mode Automatic Engine Grade Braking Your vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode. Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed by The button to turn it on or automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses off is located on instrument the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle. panel under the climate This reduces wear on the brakes system and increases controls. control of the vehicle. The system constantly monitors the vehicle’s speed, acceleration, throttle position, and whether the brake pedal is being pressed, and determines when to keep the current vehicle speed or to slow down. The system will then automatically command downshifts that reduces the vehicle’s speed, until the Push the button to turn it on, push it again to deactivate brake pedal is no longer being pressed. This indicates the system. You can use this feature to assist when the desired vehicle speed has been reached. towing or hauling a heavy load. While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode, When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbol will grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver to come on the instrument panel cluster. See Tow/Haul select a range and limiting the highest gear available. Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4-31 for Grade braking is available for normal driving and in more information. Tow/Haul mode. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-30.

2-33 Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure To set the parking brake, that the parking brake is fully released and the brake push down the parking warning light is off before driving. brake pedal down with your left foot. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you feel the pedal release, then slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will Towing a Trailer on page 4-31. come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.

2-34 Shifting Into Park Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running { CAUTION: { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If the engine running. The vehicle could move you have left the engine running, the vehicle suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in can move suddenly. You or others could be P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine even when you are on fairly level ground, use running, it could overheat and even catch fire. the steps that follow. If you are pulling a You or others could be injured. Do not leave trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-31. the vehicle with the engine running.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your page 2-34 for more information. parking brake is ﬁrmly set before you leave it. After you 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move all the way toward the front of the vehicle. the shift lever away from PARK (P) without ﬁrst pushing the button. 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can locked in PARK (P). leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-35 Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the release system. The shift lock release is designed to: vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may ﬁnd it difficult to pull the shift lever • Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into fully released, and PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. • Prevent movement of the shift lever out of To ﬁnd out how, see Shifting Into Park on page 2-35. PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. is applied. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another The shift lock release is always functional except in the vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, battery. so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for more information.

2-36 To shift out of PARK (P) use the following: Engine Exhaust 1. Apply the brake pedal. 2. Then press the shift lever button. { 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. CAUTION: If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P): Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas 1. Fully release the shift lever button. carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or 2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. shift lever button again. You might have exhaust coming in if: 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. • The exhaust system sounds strange or If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P), different. consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. service. • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. • Your vehicle was damaged when driving Parking Over Things That Burn over high points on the road or over road debris. • Repairs were not done correctly. { CAUTION: • Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modiﬁed improperly. Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not vehicle: park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other • Drive it only with all the windows down to things that can burn. blow out any CO. • Have your vehicle ﬁxed immediately.

2-37 Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you { CAUTION: ever have to, here are some things to know. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with { CAUTION: the parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine Idling the engine with the climate control is running unless you have to. If you have left system off could allow dangerous exhaust into the engine running, the vehicle can move your vehicle. See the earlier caution under suddenly. You or others could be injured. To Engine Exhaust on page 2-37. be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly parking brake and move the shift lever to carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if PARK (P). the climate control fan is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not NEVER park in a garage with the engine move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-35. running. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on Also see “If You Are Caught in a Blizzard” page 4-31. under Winter Driving on page 4-17.

2-38 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® and Compass Manual Rearview Mirror with Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview OnStar® mirror with a compass. There may be three additional buttons for the OnStar® When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, system. See your dealer/retailer for more information adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your ® vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar . See OnStar¨ System on page 2-47 for more information down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows ® you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps about the services OnStar provides. behind you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime use O (On/Off): This is the on/off button. and to the left for daytime use. There may also be three OnStar® buttons located at the Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time the ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic OnStar®. See OnStar¨ System on page 2-47 for more dimming feature off or back on, press the on/off button. information on the services OnStar® provides. The indicator light on the mirror is lit when the automatic dimming feature is on. Compass Operation Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on or off. There is a compass display in the window in the upper right corner of the mirror face.

2-39 Compass Calibration Press and hold the on/off button to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will be displayed in the compass window on the mirror. The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction. If after a few seconds the display does not show a compass direction, (N for North for example), there may be a strong magnetic ﬁeld interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C or CAL appears in the compass window, the compass may need to be reset or calibrated. Compass Variance Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be 2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zone necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for number is displayed. The number shown is the compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under current zone number. certain circumstances, such as during a long distance 3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for window on the mirror by pressing the on/off button. compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass Once you ﬁnd your zone number, release the button. variance, your compass could give false readings. After about four seconds, the mirror will return to the To adjust for compass variance: compass display, and the new zone number will be 1. Find your current location and variance zone set. If C or CAL appears in the compass window, the number on the following zone map. compass may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed previously.

2-40 Outside Power Mirrors Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the If your vehicle is equipped mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure with outside power mirrors, to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position the controls are located before driving. on the driver door armrest. The use of hood-mounted air deﬂectors and add-on convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror performance. Turn Signal Indicator Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the mirror. An arrow on the mirror ﬂashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Press (A) to select the driver side mirror or (B) to select the passenger side mirror. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. To adjust each mirror, press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjust each outside mirror to see a little of your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for more information.

2-41 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually, they may shake or ﬂutter at normal driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this If your vehicle is equipped happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See with outside power “Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next. foldaway mirrors, the controls are located on the Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors driver’s door armrest. You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the following occurs: • The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding. • They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. • The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position. • The mirrors shake and ﬂutter at normal driving • Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then speeds. press the arrows located on the four-way control To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset the mirror. them to their normal position. • Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror. This mirror has the following features. Then press the arrows located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to Automatic Dimming deselect the mirror. The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the • Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming ¨ position. Rearview Mirror with OnStar and Compass on page 2-39. • Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position.

2-42 Park Tilt Mirrors Outside Convex Mirror If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside mirrors are able to perform the park tilt function. This feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the { CAUTION: curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to its If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition is turned off or to could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your OFF/LOCK. inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 and The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for more mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from information. the driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. Turn Signal Indicator Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the Outside Heated Mirrors mirror. An arrow on the mirror will ﬂash in the direction of the turn or lane change. < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-26 for more information.

2-43 Object Detection Systems CAUTION: (Continued) Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist If you do not use proper care before and while (URPA) backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist could occur. Even with URPA, always check (URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph behind your vehicle before backing up. While (8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and backing, be sure to look for objects and check avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on your vehicle’s mirrors. the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground. The display is located in the headliner and can be seen by looking over { CAUTION: your right shoulder.

The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect: • objects that are below the bumper, underneath the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from the vehicle • children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance and system information. CAUTION: (Continued)

2-44 How the System Works The following describes what will occur with the URPA display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object: URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly Description English Metric illuminates to indicate the system is working. amber light 8 ft 2.5 m URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m (8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light amber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m on the rear display will flash. amber/amber/red lights To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches flashing and beep for 1 ft 0.3 m (25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects three seconds must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or humid The system can be disabled through the Driver weather. Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on A single beep will sound the first time an object is page 3-54 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m) DIC Buttons) on page 3-60 for more information. away. Beeping will occur for a short time when the vehicle is closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.

2-45 When the System Does Not Seem to • A tow bar is attached to the vehicle. Work Properly • The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer to repair the system. If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition, the message PARKING ASSIST OFF will • Other conditions may affect system performance, be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved compression of air brakes on a very large truck. into R (Reverse). This occurs under the following If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at conditions: least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your • The driver disables the system. dealer/retailer. • The parking brake pedal is depressed. Rear Vision Camera (RVC) • The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system. ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Read the entire section before using the system. Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-104. The rear vision camera system is designed to help the • A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or driver when backing up. See “Rear Vision Camera” an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the in the Index of the navigation manual. last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the rear display. Once the attached object is removed, URPA will return to normal operation.

2-46 OnStar® System OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles. OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety, services described below, or for a full description of security, information, and convenience services. If your OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com. automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location. OnStar Services If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan, your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this Service for you. plan beyond the ﬁrst year, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections Plan. For more information, press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until you register with OnStar.

2-47 Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan Available Services included with • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Directions & Connections Plan • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) • All Safe and Sound Plan Services (If equipped) • Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar • Link to Emergency Services Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) • Roadside Assistance • RideAssist • Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance • Information and Convenience Services • AccidentAssist OnStar Hands-Free Calling • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into • GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also 30 complimentary minutes be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

2-48 OnStar Virtual Advisor How OnStar Service Works OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access recording and transmitting vehicle information. This location-based weather, local traffic reports, and information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving Center at the time of an OnStar button press, a few simple voice commands, you can browse Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes Guide for more information (Only available in the your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, continental U.S.). additional information regarding the accident that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from OnStar Steering Wheel Controls which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling. can provide you with location-based services. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-126 for more information. OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for service provider for service in that area. OnStar a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to service also cannot work unless you are in a place activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling. where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial that area has coverage, network capacity and reception numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone when the service is needed, and technology that is extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are information. available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

2-49 Location information about your vehicle is only available Universal Home Remote if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available. System Your vehicle must have a working electrical system The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to (including adequate battery power) for the OnStar replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF) equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar transmitters used to activate devices such as garage cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing door openers, security systems, and home lighting. OnStar service to you at any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important parts of your This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, Operation is subject to the following two conditions: weather or wireless phone network congestion. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. Your Responsibility 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar operation. advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, this means that your system is not functioning properly This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the Operation is subject to the following two conditions: light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar 1. This device may not cause interference. subscription has expired. You can always press the OnStar button to conﬁrm that your OnStar equipment is 2. This device must accept any interference received, active. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modiﬁcations to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

2-50 Universal Home Remote System Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote. Because of Operation (With One Triangular LED) the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming the Universal Home Remote. Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section. If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED) When programming a garage door, park outside of indicator light above the Universal Home Remote the garage. Park directly in line with and facing buttons, follow the instructions below. the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. This system provides a way to replace up to three Be sure that people and objects are clear of the remote control transmitters used to activate devices garage door or gate that is being programmed. such as garage door openers, security systems, It is recommended that a new battery be installed in and home automation devices. your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

2-51 Programming the Universal Home Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program Remote System the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. For questions or help programming the Universal 2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go to 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal www.homelink.com. Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator Programming a garage door opener involves light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure by the manufacturer of your garage door opener before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and receiver (motor head unit). the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal To program up to three devices: Home Remote button to be used to control the garage door and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the Universal Home Remote button or the hand-held transmitter button until Step 4 has been completed. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require substitution of Step 3 with the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” later in this section. 4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote 1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after two outside buttons at the same time, releasing Universal Home Remote successfully receives the only when the Universal Home Remote indicator frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step Release both buttons. will erase the factory settings or all previously programmed buttons.

2-52 5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, the programming is complete and the garage door should move when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released. There is no need to continue programming Steps 6 through 8. If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with the programming Steps 6 through 8. It may be helpful to have another person assist with the remaining steps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed, locate inside the garage the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. After you press this button, you will have 30 seconds to complete Step 8.

2-53 8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in programming a gate operator or garage door opener by Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds, using the “Programming Universal Home Remote” and then release it. If the garage door does not procedures, regardless of where you live, replace move, press and hold the same button a second time Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if the with the following: door does not move, press and hold the same button Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote a third time for two seconds, and then release. button while you press and release every two seconds The Universal Home Remote should now activate (cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the the garage door. frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the indicator light will ﬂash slowly at ﬁrst and then rapidly. Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal as this will erase all previous programming from the Home Remote” to complete. Universal Home Remote buttons. Using Universal Home Remote Gate Operator and Canadian Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote Programming button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go to www.homelink.com. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner.

2-54 Erasing Universal Home Remote For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number Buttons under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6. The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. Storage Areas To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal Home Remote device: Glove Box To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock and unlock. Cupholders There are two cupholders, with removable liners, located in front of the center console. There are cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the armrest down. There are additional cupholders the indicator light begins to ﬂash, after 20 seconds. located on each side of the third row seat and in each 2. Release both buttons. door. There are cupholders located behind the center console. To access, pull down on the handle. Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button Instrument Panel Storage To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote Your vehicle has an instrument panel storage area buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier located above the radio. To open the cover, press in this section, beginning with Step 2. the button.

2-55 Center Console Storage Second Row Center Console

The armrest on the center console can slide forwards Your vehicle may have a second row center console. and backwards by holding up the lever located on the front of it. To open the armrest storage area, press the button located on the front of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move the armrest all the way to the rear position. The tray can be removed for additional storage.

2-56 { CAUTION:

Never open more than one of the three latches at a time. This is to help avoid personal injury and damage to the console.

Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward. This will help prevent damage to the consoles. Assist Handles To access the upper storage area, press the upper button (2) and lift up. To access the lower storage area, Your vehicle has assist handles above the rear and press the lower button (3) and lift up. The top of the front passenger windows. These are to be used when console can be folded forward for increased storage getting out of your vehicle. area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (1) and pull forward. Floor Mats There is a grommet in the driver side floor mat that attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle to hold the floor mat in place. To remove the floor mat, pull the mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the grommet can be removed from the hook.

2-57 Luggage Carrier Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests as far forward as { CAUTION: possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely. If you try to carry something on top of your Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on and so forth — the wind can catch it as you page 4-22. drive along. This can cause you to lose To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, control. What you are carrying could be check to make sure the cargo is still securely fastened. violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course Rear Seat Armrest damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry something like this inside. But, never carry Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest that contains something longer or wider than the luggage two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the carrier on top of your vehicle. armrest down from the rear seatback. Convenience Net If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not standard on The vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear. this vehicle and must be purchased at your Store small loads as far forward as possible. The dealer/retailer. net should not be used to store heavy loads.

2-58 Cargo Cover Your vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can be used to cover items in the rear of the vehicle. To install the cover, place the loops on each corner of the cover on the four hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The cover should be stored securely when not in use. Cargo Tie Downs There are four cargo tie-downs located in the rear compartment of the vehicle, that can be used to secure small loads. Cargo Management System There is an additional storage compartment on each side Your vehicle has a cargo management system located of the system. To open, unlatch and lift the panel up. in the rear of the vehicle. To open, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the cover up. To remove the cargo management system: 1. Open the lid. 2. Remove the side panels and place inside the bin. 3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of the system by turning them counterclockwise. 4. Close the lid. 5. Pull up on the system by using the built in handles and remove it from the vehicle.

2-59 Sunroof Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and release the rear of the driver’s side The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats, switch to express-open the sunroof. Press and and a rear sunroof over the second row seats. The rear release the front of the driver’s side switch to sunroof does not open. The switches to operate the express-close the sunroof. front sunroof and rear sunshade are located on The front sunshade must be opened and closed the headliner above the rearview mirror. The ignition manually. Push up on the sunshade handle to open the must be in ON or ACCESSORY to operate the sunroof. sunshade. See Ignition Positions on page 2-26. Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade. To open the rear sunshade, located over the second row seats, press and release the rear of the passenger’s side switch. Press and release the front of the switch to close the sunshade.

Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the front of the driver’s side switch to vent the sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch to close the sunroof.

2-60 Section 3 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...... 3-4 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 3-19 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-6 Parade Dimming ...... 3-19 Other Warning Devices ...... 3-7 Reading Lamps ...... 3-20 Horn ...... 3-7 Electric Power Management ...... 3-20 Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ...... 3-7 Battery Run-Down Protection ...... 3-21 Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Accessory Power Outlet(s) ...... 3-21 Steering Column ...... 3-8 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ...... 3-22 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ...... 3-8 Climate Controls ...... 3-23 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 3-9 Climate Control System ...... 3-23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ...... 3-9 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...... 3-26 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-10 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-34 Windshield Wipers ...... 3-10 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-34 Windshield Washer ...... 3-10 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...... 3-11 and Electronic Climate Controls ...... 3-36 Cruise Control ...... 3-12 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-15 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ...... 3-37 Delayed Headlamps ...... 3-16 Instrument Panel Cluster ...... 3-38 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ Speedometer and Odometer ...... 3-39 Automatic Headlamp System ...... 3-16 Tachometer ...... 3-39 Fog Lamps ...... 3-17 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-39 Instrument Panel Brightness ...... 3-17 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 3-40 Courtesy Lamps ...... 3-17 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...... 3-41 Dome Lamps ...... 3-18 Charging System Light ...... 3-43 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-18 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-44 Entry Lighting ...... 3-18 Brake System Warning Light ...... 3-45 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 3-19 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-46

3-1 Section 3 Instrument Panel

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ...... 3-46 Audio System(s) ...... 3-82 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ...... 3-47 Setting the Clock ...... 3-84 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 3-47 Radio(s) (MP3) ...... 3-86 Tire Pressure Light ...... 3-48 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 3-48 Six-Disc CD Player) ...... 3-104 Oil Pressure Light ...... 3-51 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and Security Light ...... 3-51 DVD Player) ...... 3-108 Fog Lamp Light ...... 3-52 XM Radio Messages ...... 3-114 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-52 Navigation/Radio System ...... 3-115 Highbeam On Light ...... 3-52 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System ...... 3-115 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 3-52 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 3-124 Fuel Gage ...... 3-53 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-126 Driver Information Center (DIC) ...... 3-54 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...... 3-126 DIC Operation and Displays Radio Reception ...... 3-127 (With DIC Buttons) ...... 3-54 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 3-128 DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) ...... 3-60 DIC Warnings and Messages ...... 3-64 DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) ...... 3-74

3-2 ✍ NOTES

3-3 Instrument Panel Overview

3-4 The main components of your instrument panel are listed here: A. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-34. I. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp B. Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Override on page 3-18. Instrument Panel Brightness Lever on page 3-8. Control. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-17. Windshield Wipers. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. J. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on page 3-12. C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-38. K. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel. See Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 3-7. Power Tilt D. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Wheel and Telescopic Steering (If Equipped). Information Center (DIC) on page 3-54. See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering E. Storage Area. See Instrument Panel Storage on Column on page 3-8. page 2-55. L. Horn. See Horn on page 3-7. F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-82. M. Audio Steering Wheel Control Buttons. See Audio Navigation/Radio System (If Equipped). See Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-126. Navigation/Radio System on page 3-115. N. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard G. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on Warning Flashers on page 3-6. page 3-15. O. Center Console Shift Lever. See “Console Shift H. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11. Lever” under Shifting Into Park on page 2-35.

3-5 P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer. See Rear Window Hazard Warning Flashers Wiper/Washer on page 3-11. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button (If Equipped). The hazard warning flashers let you warn others. See StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-6. Tow/Haul They also let police know you have a problem. Selector Button (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode The front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on on page 2-33. Power Liftgate Button (If Equipped). and off. See Power Liftgate on page 2-14. Q. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power The hazard warning Outlet(s) on page 3-21. flasher button is located in the center of the R. Heated Seats Button. See Heated Seats on page 1-5. instrument panel, below S. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See Dual the audio system. Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-26. T. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-73. U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-55. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. The hazard warning flashers work at all times. However, when they are on, the turn signals will not work.

3-6 Other Warning Devices If you carry reﬂective triangles, you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted. The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or down and in or out. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while driving.

3-7 Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Steering Column For vehicles with the power tilt wheel control, it is located on the left side of the steering column.

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: Push the control up or down and forward or rearward to G move the steering wheel. • Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-9. Do not adjust the power tilt wheel control while driving. • 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9. • Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-10. • N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on page 3-10. • L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10. For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-15.

3-8 Turn and Lane-Change Signals If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you The turn signal has two upward (for right) and signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check two downward (for left) positions. These positions the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. page 5-111. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is ﬁnished, the lever will return Turn Signal On Chime automatically. If either one of the turn signals are left on and you have drove more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound. An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will ﬂash in the direction of the Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer turn or lane change. To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the front of the vehicle.

This light on the instrument To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until panel cluster comes on if the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete the high beam lamps your lane change. The lever will return by itself when are turned on while the you release it. If you momentarily press and release the ignition is on. lever, the turn signal will flash three times. If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal. To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rear of the vehicle.

3-9 Flash-to-Pass Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position, gently loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, pull the lever toward you momentarily to switch install new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield to high-beam, to signal that you are going to pass. Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-48. If the headlamps are on, they will return to low-beam Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit when the lever is released. breaker stop them until the motor cools. Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the J (Washer Fluid): Press the button located at the right side of the steering column. end of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the washer ﬂuid on the windshield. The wipers clear the windshield wipers. windshield and either stop or return to the preset speed. The ignition key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or 8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping ON/RUN for this to work. See Windshield Washer Fluid cycle and then release. The wipers stop after one wipe. on page 5-33 Windshield Washer Fluid. Hold the band on 8 longer, for more wipe cycles. 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. { CAUTION: 6 (Delay): Adjusts the delay time. The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to In freezing weather, do not use your washer the top of the lever. until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer ﬂuid can form ice on the windshield, 1 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed. blocking your vision. 2 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.

3-10 WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the Under certain outside temperature conditions, steam Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washer might flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is a normal. page 3-64. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the Heated Windshield Washer DIC when the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid system, it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, Rear Window Wiper/Washer or bugs from the windshield. This feature only works with the front wiper system. The rear wiper and rear wash button is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. The button is located to the left of the steering Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the rear wiper on and column below the off. The wiper speed cannot be changed. instrument panel brightness control knob. Y (Wash): Press to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The window wiper will also come on. Release the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on the window. The rear wiper will run a few more cycles Press the heated washer fluid button to activate the after it is released. If the rear wiper function was already heated windshield washer fluid system. This activation on, prior to pressing the wash button, it stays on until begins four heated wash/wipe cycles. The first heated the wiper button is pressed again. wash/wipe cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur, The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in depending on outside temperature. After the first the windshield washer reservoir. See Windshield wash/wipe cycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for Washer Fluid on page 5-33. each of the remaining cycles. The system turns off automatically after four wipe cycles or the button can be pressed again to turn it off.

3-11 Cruise Control The cruise control buttons are located on left side of With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) the steering wheel. or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off.

{ CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where you T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise control on and off. cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do The indicator comes on when cruise control is on. not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire SET–: Press to set the speed or make the vehicle traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and decelerate. you could lose control. Do not use cruise [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control. control on slippery roads.

3-12 Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then if the master cylinder brake ﬂuid level is low. the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off. But it The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster does not need to be reset. comes on after the cruise control has been set to Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or the desired speed. greater, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and { stays there. CAUTION: Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button There are two ways to increase the vehicle speed while using cruise control: and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. • Press and hold the +RES button on the steering Keep the cruise control switch off until you wheel until the desired speed is reached, then want to use cruise control. release it. • To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press the +RES button brieﬂy. Each time this is 1. Press the I button. done, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) 2. Get up to the speed desired. faster. 3. Press and release the SET– button located on the steering wheel. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

3-13 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Using Cruise Control on Hills Control How well the cruise control will work on hills depends There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the using cruise control: hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle • Press and hold the SET– button on the steering speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or wheel until the lower speed desired is reached, shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. then release it. When the brakes are applied the cruise control is • To slow down in very small amounts, press the turned off. SET– button brieﬂy. Each time this is done, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) Ending Cruise Control slower. There are three ways to end cruise control: Passing Another Vehicle While Using • Step lightly on the brake pedal. Cruise Control • Press the [ button. Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed. • Press the T button. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

3-14 Exterior Lamps • License Plate Lamps The exterior lamps control • Instrument Panel Lights is located on the ; instrument panel to the left (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps of the steering wheel. together with the following: • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights It controls the following systems: 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together • Headlamps with the following lamps listed below. A warning chime • Taillamps will sound if the driver’s door is opened when the • Parking Lamps ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on. • License Plate Lamps • Parking Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights • Taillamps • Fog Lamps (If Equipped) • License Plate Lamps The exterior lamps control has four positions: • Instrument Panel Lights O (Off): Turns the automatic light control on or off. - (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped): Turns on the AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the fog lamps. headlamps at normal brightness, together with the See Fog Lamps on page 3-17. following: • Parking Lamps • Taillamps

3-15 Delayed Headlamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ The delayed headlamps feature provides a period of Automatic Headlamp System exterior lighting as you leave the area around your vehicle. The feature is activated when the headlamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for are on due to the automatic headlamps control others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. feature described previously in this section, and when Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on the ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will then all vehicles ﬁrst sold in Canada. remain on until the exterior lamps control is moved to The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come the parking lamps position or until the pre-selected on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions delayed headlamp lighting period has ended. are met: If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps switch in • The ignition is in the ON/RUN position. the parking lamps or headlamps position, the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur. • The exterior lamps control is in AUTO. To disable the delayed headlamps feature or change • The engine is running. the time of delay, see DIC Vehicle Customization When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps, (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74. taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel and cluster will also not be lit. The headlamps automatically change from DRL to the regular headlamps depending on the darkness of the surroundings. The other lamps that come on with the headlamps will also come on.

3-16 When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go Instrument Panel Brightness off and the DRL will come on. D The regular headlamp system should be turned on (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob with this when needed. symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps control to the left of the steering wheel. Push the knob Do not cover the light sensor on top of the instrument in all the way until it extends out and then turn the panel because it operates the DRL. knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lights. Push the knob back in when ﬁnished. Fog Lamps - (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with fog lamps, Courtesy Lamps the button is located on the exterior lamps control. When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument automatically come on. They make it easy for you to panel to the left of the steering column. enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the turn these lamps on by fully turning the instrument panel fog lamps to come on. brightness control clockwise. The reading lamps, located on the headliner above the Press - to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light will rearview mirror, can be turned on or off independent come on in the instrument panel cluster. of the automatic courtesy lamps, when the doors When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, are closed. the fog lamps also go off. Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

3-17 Dome Lamps Entry Lighting The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is For vehicles with courtesy lamps, they come on and opened, unless the dome lamp override button is stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol pressed in. is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning the Transmitter, if the vehicle has one. instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the If a door is opened, the lamps stay on while it is open farthest position. and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after the door is closed. If the unlock symbol is pressed and no door is opened, the lamps turn off after about Dome Lamp Override 20 seconds. The dome lamp override button is located next to the Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming. exterior lamps control. With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim after off or come on automatically when a door is opened. the delay time until they go out. The delay time is E canceled if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN or the (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in power door lock switch is pressed. The lamps will and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. dim right away. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive, is opened. which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless a door is opened.

3-18 Delayed Entry Lighting Delayed Exit Lighting Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time period of time after all the doors have been closed. after the key is removed from the ignition. The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work. to work. Immediately after all the doors have been When the key is removed, interior illumination will closed, the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to activate and remain on until one of the following occurs: work until one of the following occurs: • The ignition is in ON/RUN. • The ignition is in ON/RUN. • The power door locks are activated. • The doors are locked. • An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed. • An illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed. If during the illumination period a door is opened, If during the illumination period a door is opened, the timed illumination period will be canceled and the the timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior lamps will remain on because a door is open. interior lamps will remain on because a door is open. Parade Dimming Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of the instrument panel displays during the daylight while the headlamps are on so that the displays are still able to be seen.

3-19 Reading Lamps A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off. speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. Electric Power Management EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase estimates the battery’s temperature and state of engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of and extended life of the battery. some accessories. When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver will be displayed. reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.

3-20 Battery Run-Down Protection Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery off electrical equipment when not in use and do from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are amperage rating of 20 amperes. accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible they automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition with the accessory power outlets and could result is off. The lamps will not come back on again until in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a one of the following occurs: problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional • The ignition is turned on. information on the accessory power outlet. • The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the again. vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use manually turned on before the ignition is off. equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before Accessory Power Outlet(s) adding electrical equipment. Accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliary When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone. installation instructions included with the equipment. The vehicle may have four accessory power outlets. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause They are located on the instrument panel below damage not covered by your warranty. Do not the climate controls, inside the front center console hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket storage bin, at the rear of the center console, and in the from the plug because the power outlets are rear cargo area. designed for accessory power plugs only. To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

3-21 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating The indicator light does not come on when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into Current the outlet. For vehicles with this power outlet, it can be used to If equipment is connected using more than 150 watts or plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum limit of a system fault is detected, a protection circuit shuts 150 watts. off the power supply and the indicator light turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it back in The power outlet is located or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off and on the rear of the center then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on console. page 2-27. The power restarts when equipment using 150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system fault is not detected. The power outlet is not designed for the following electrical equipment and may not work properly if these items are plugged into the power outlet: • Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as: compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools. • Other equipment requiring an extremely stable An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc. and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged See High Voltage Devices and Wiring on page 5-110. into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.

3-22 Climate Controls Airflow Mode Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of the vehicle. Climate Control System To change the current mode, select one of the following: With this system you can control the heating, cooling, H defrost, defog, and ventilation of the vehicle. (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and half to the floor outlets. A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically selects outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected when in Floor Mode. Manual Operation The right knob can also be used to select defog or 9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. and Defrosting” later in this section. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the By positioning the right knob between two modes, front system off. a combination of those two modes is selected. Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature of the air flowing from the system.

3-23 @ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the # (Air Conditioning): Press this button on the left recirculation mode on or off. The indicator light on the knob to turn the air conditioning system on or off. button turns on when this mode is selected. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning has been activated. This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. The air conditioning compressor does not operate It can be used to reduce the outside air and odors when outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C). entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also help cool The indicator light flashes three times and turns off when the air inside the vehicle more quickly once the outside conditions affect air conditioning operation. temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside This is normal. temperature. For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following: The recirculation mode can be turned off in vent and bi-level modes by pressing the button again. 1. Open the windows to let hot air escape. Recirculation mode automatically turns off when the 2. Select the vent mode. engine is turned off and must be re-selected when the 3. Select the air conditioner. engine is turned on again. 4. Select the coolest temperature. The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in 5. Select the highest fan speed. one of those modes, the indicator flashes three times and 6. Close the windows after the hot air has escaped. turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes on 7. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is below the when this mode is activated unless the outside air outside temperature, select recirculation mode for temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). While in recirculation better cooling. mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to mode and increase the fan speed. cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

3-24 Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the system turns off recirculation and runs the air the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry. To conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature prevent this from happening, after the inside of the is less than 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off. cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you might notice a small amount of water 0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog dripping underneath the front center and right rear of the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode This is normal. directs most of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the ﬂoor vents. In this mode, the system will automatically force outside air into your Defogging and Defrosting vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside glass. This can be minimized if the climate control temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive system is used properly. There are two modes to clear the vehicle until all the windows are clear. fog or frost from the windshield. Turn the right knob AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear clockwise to select the defog or defrost mode. heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 3-34 or - (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Electronic Climate Controls on page 3-36. This mode directs air to the windshield, ﬂoor outlets, and side window vents. When you select this mode,

3-25 Rear Window Defogger Dual Automatic Climate Control The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to System remove fog from the rear window. The heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle can < (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button on the be controlled with this system. Your vehicle also has right knob to turn the rear window defogger on or off. a ﬂow-through ventilation system described later in this The rear window defogger stays on about 10 minutes section. after the button is pressed, before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed. Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or Different temperature settings can be selected for the anything similar to the defogger grid. driver and all passengers.

3-26 Display Function Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Each time the temperature, mode, or fan control buttons The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used to are pressed, the climate control display shows that change the temperature of the air coming through function along with the inside temperature setting. the system on the passenger side of the vehicle. The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument The temperature can be adjusted even if the system panel cluster. is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always ﬂow through the system as the vehicle is moving Driver’s Side Temperature Control forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. The driver side temperature buttons are used to adjust See “Recirculation” later in this section. the temperature of the air coming through the system Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the on the driver side. The temperature can be adjusted temperature. The passenger side display will show the even if the system is turned off. This is possible since temperature setting decreasing or increasing. outside air will always ﬂow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the section. PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. When the passenger’s temperature setting is set Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the temperature. The driver side temperature display PASS button comes on and both the driver side will show the temperature setting decreasing or and passenger side temperature displays are shown. increasing.

3-27 Automatic Operation 2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature. To ﬁnd your comfort setting, start with a 73°F (22°C) AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes active the system controls the inside temperature, for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or the air delivery, and the fan speed. passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the Use the steps below to place the entire system in temperature setting as necessary. If you choose automatic mode: the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system remains at the maximum cooling setting. If you 1. Press the AUTO button. choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), When AUTO is selected, the display shows the the system remains at the maximum heat setting. current temperature(s) selected and AUTO is on the Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the display. The current delivery mode and fan speed vehicle to heat or cool any faster. also display for approximately 5 seconds. Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor operation and air inlet are automatically controlled. regulates air temperature based on sun load and also The air conditioning compressor runs when the turns on your vehicle’s headlamps. For more information outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section. The air inlet is normally set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet can automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle. The light comes on the recirculation button while in recirculation.

3-28 To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system Manual Operation delays turning on the fan until warm air is available. The length of delay depends on the engine coolant The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually temperature. Press the fan switch to override this delay adjusted. and change the fan to a selected speed. DC(Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols let you O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the climate manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow control system. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by fan speed. pressing the mode button. Recirculation can only Pressing a fan button while the system is off will turn be selected in vent or bi-level mode. The temperature the system on. Pressing a fan button while in automatic can also be adjusted using either temperature button. control places the fan under manual control. The fan If you adjust the air delivery mode or temperature setting remains displayed, the word AUTO is no longer settings with the system off, the display comes on briefly displayed, and the AUTO button indicator light turns to show the settings and then turns off. Press the off. The air delivery mode remains in automatic control. on/off button or the up down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the air conditioning y N z (Mode): Press the mode up and down button to turn the system on when it is off. buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display. Pressing a mode button while the system is off will change air delivery mode without turning the system on. Pressing one of these buttons while in automatic control to place the mode under manual control.

3-29 The air delivery mode setting remains displayed, the @ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the word AUTO is no longer displayed, and the AUTO recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, button indicator light turns off. an indicator light comes on. H (Vent): This setting delivers air to the instrument This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. panel outlets. It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent ) odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculation also (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the instrument helps to quickly cool the warmer air inside your vehicle. panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets. The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select air to the floor outlets. recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns off. The air conditioning 6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the compressor also comes on when this mode is activated. floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the While in recirculation mode the windows may fog windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, outlets. In this mode, the system automatically select either the defog or defrost mode and increase selects outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected the fan speed. in floor mode. Press the button again to turn off the recirculation - (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in mode. It automatically turns off when the engine is this section. turned off and must be re-selected when the engine is turned on again.

3-30 Air Conditioning Sensors

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When air conditioning is selected, an indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning has been activated. The air conditioning compressor does not work when outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C). Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too cool makes the air conditioning indicator ﬂash three times and turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system system to operate more efficiently. will not work properly. The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so a small amount of water may drip underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

3-31 The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures. Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog The interior temperature sensor located on the mode. Use the defrost button to select the defrost mode. instrument panel to the right of the steering column, measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle. - (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. There is also an exterior temperature sensor located This mode directs air to the windshield, ﬂoor outlets, behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside and side window vents. When this mode is selected, air temperature and helps maintain the temperature the system turns off recirculation and runs the air inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be temperature. selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-32 To clear fog from the rear seat side windows, select the Rear Window Defogger bi-level mode on the rear climate control system and direct the headliner outlets toward the side windows. The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. 0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs < (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to most of the air to the windshield and side window vents turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear and some to the ﬂoor vents. In this mode, the system window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes after automatically forces outside air into the vehicle. the button is pressed, before turning off. The defogger The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor runs turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all automatically in this setting, unless the outside the windows are clear. temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, vehicle until all the windows are clear. the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the While in defrost mode, if the PASS button is pressed, surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button the PASS button indicator will ﬂash three times to let you is pressed. know that the passenger climate control system Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object cannot be activated. If the passenger temperature to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere buttons are adjusted while in defrost mode, the driver anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. temperature indicator will change. The passenger These actions may damage the rear defogger. temperature will not be displayed. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 3-34 or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3-36.

3-33 Outlet Adjustment Rear Air Conditioning and Use the slider switch in the center of the outlet, to Heating System change the direction of the air flow. Use the thumbwheel near the outlet to control the amount of air flow or to If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls are shut off the airflow completely. three knobs located on the rear of the center console. The system can be controlled from the front controls Keep all outlets open whenever possible for best as well as the rear controls. system performance. To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the Operation Tips front climate control system, an indicator will be lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air rear system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the inlets at the base of the windshield that can airflow in the rear will be approximately the same block the flow of air into the vehicle. direction, temperature, and fan speed as the front. Pressing the AUX button again will turn the rear system Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can • and the indicator off. adversely affect the performance of the system. If the rear controls are adjusted, the system turns on in • Keep the path under all seats clear of objects to a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear will help circulate the air inside the vehicle more then be directed according to the settings of the rear effectively. controls. The rear system can be turned off by pressing • If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes the AUX button on the front climate control system with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn and the indicator will turn off. The system can be turned on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging. back on, by adjusting any of the rear air conditioning control knobs.

3-34 Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel lets you choose the direction of the air ﬂow.

H (Vent): This setting directs the air through the headliner outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This setting directs the air through the rear floor outlets under the third row seat, as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be divided between headliner and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. Fan Knob 6 (Floor): This setting directs the air through the floor Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all under the third row seats. the way counterclockwise to turn the rear system off. Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise for warmer or cooler air.

3-35 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls If your vehicle has this rear climate control system there are rear seat audio controls located in the center console. The rear system can be controlled through the AUX button on the front climate control panel. Press the AUX button to turn the rear climate control system on or off. An indicator light in the AUX button comes on when the rear climate control system is on. The direction, temperature, and speed of the airflow for the rear of the vehicle will be the same as those Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls set for the front of the vehicle. Use the controls located in the rear of the front console, Manual Operation to independently control the air flow for the rear of the vehicle separately from that of the front of the DC(Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat audio vehicle. To turn the system on, press any of the rear control panel let you manually adjust the fan speed. air conditioning control buttons, except the C button. Press D to increase airflow and C to decrease airflow. To turn the system off, press and hold the C button.

3-36 +/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These buttons Warning Lights, Gages, and select the temperature of the air flowing into the rear passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and Indicators press the − button for cooler air. The temperature settings will display in 0-12 increments, going from the coolest (0) This section describes the warning lights and gages on to the warmest (12) setting. the vehicle. N Warning lights and gages can signal that something is (Mode): Press the mode button to manually change wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to press the button until the desired mode appears on the the warning lights and gages could prevent injury. display. Multiple presses cycles through the delivery selections. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some H (Vent): This mode directs air through the headliner warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started outlets. to indicate they are working. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air through the floor with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and outlets as well as the headliner outlets. The rear system warning lights work together to indicate a problem with floor outlets are located under the third row seats. the vehicle. 6 (Floor): This mode directs air through the floor When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located under while driving, or when one of the gages shows there the third row seats. may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

3-37 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-38 Speedometer and Odometer Safety Belt Reminders The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles Safety Belt Reminder Light per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been When the engine is started, a chime comes on for driven, in either miles or kilometers. several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the new The safety belt light will one will be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. also come on and stay on If this is not possible, it will be set at zero and a for several seconds, label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old then it will ﬂash for mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. several more. If the mileage is unknown, the label should then indicate “previous mileage unknown”.

Tachometer This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will per minute (rpm). come on.

3-39 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument sounds for several seconds to remind the front panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger malfunctions. The light indicates if there is an electrical Sensing System on page 1-73 for more information. problem. The system check includes the airbag The passenger safety belt light, located on the sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the instrument panel, will come on and stay on for wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. several seconds and then ﬂash for several more. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-64. This chime and light are repeated if the passenger This light comes on when remains unbuckled and the vehicle is started, and the vehicle is in motion. ﬂashes for a few seconds. The light should go out when the system is ready.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

3-40 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator { CAUTION: Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status If the airbag readiness light stays on after you indicator. start your vehicle, it means the airbag system may not be working properly. The airbags in your vehicle may not inﬂate in a crash, or they could even inﬂate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away.

United States Canada The airbag readiness light should ﬂash for a few seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not come on When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status then, have it ﬁxed immediately. If there is a problem with indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you (DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. if equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.

3-41 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact { CAUTION: airbag are enabled (may inflate). Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s { CAUTION: frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, rear-facing child restraint installed in the right and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not front passenger’s seat, it means that the deploy under some unusual circumstance, even passenger sensing system has not turned though it is turned off. We recommend that off the passenger’s frontal airbag and rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped). seat, even if the airbag is or airbags are off. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger back of the rear-facing child restraint would be sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag. rear-facing child restraint in the right front See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-73 for more passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on. on this, including important safety information.

3-42 If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights Charging System Light remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing This light comes on brieﬂy system. See your dealer/retailer for service. when the ignition key is turned, but the engine has not started to run, as a { CAUTION: check to show you it is working. If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with It should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on, the airbag system. If this ever happens, have or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the vehicle serviced promptly, because an the charging system. A charging system message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) may also appear. adult-size person sitting in the right front See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 passenger’s seat may not have the protection for more information. This light could indicate that there of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light are problems with a generator drive belt, or that on page 3-40 for more on this, including there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right important safety information. away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

3-43 Voltmeter Gage Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in When the engine is not the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an running, but the ignition is extended period. on, this gage shows If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a the battery’s state of SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message charge in DC volts. will appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and/or the charging system light will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and Charging System Light on page 3-43 for more information. However, readings in either warning zone may indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. When the engine is running, this gage shows the condition of the charging system. The vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of charge of the battery. The voltmeter may ﬂuctuate. This is normal. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.

3-44 Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into The light will stay on if your parking brake does two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake still work and stop you. For good braking, though, is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. you need both parts working well. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake Have your brake system inspected right away. is fully released. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closer to the ﬂoor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.

{ CAUTION:

United States Canada Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving This light should come on briefly when you turn the with the brake system warning light on can lead ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it to an accident. If the light is still on after you fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. This light may also come on due to low brake fluid. See Brakes on page 5-34 for more information.

3-45 Antilock Brake System (ABS) StabiliTrak® Indicator Light Warning Light This warning light should come on brieﬂy when the For vehicles with the engine is started. Antilock Brake System (ABS), this light comes on brieﬂy when the engine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. may be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light and your vehicle may need service. When this warning comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak® system or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs is active. service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on and brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is stays on for an extended period of time when the system also on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes is turned on, your vehicle needs service. See StabiliTrak¨ and there is a problem with the regular brakes. System on page 4-6 for more information. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45. For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for all brake related DIC messages.

3-46 Engine Coolant Temperature Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Warning Light The engine coolant temperature warning light will come on when the engine has overheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on United States Canada page 5-23 for more information. This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature Under normal driving conditions the gage will read warning light on could cause your vehicle to 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage pointer is near overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23. 260°F (125 °C), the engine is too hot. Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be covered by your warranty. Never drive with the It means that your engine coolant has overheated. engine coolant temperature warning light on. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your This light will also come on brieﬂy when starting your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23 for more information.

3-47 Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and Then is Solid Your vehicle may have a tire pressure light. This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a minute and stays on solid for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-58 for more information. Malfunction Indicator Lamp This light comes on briefly when the engine is started and provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II (On-Board When the Light is Solid Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of This indicates that one or more of your tires are the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes significantly underinflated. sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner A tire pressure message in the Driver Information environment. Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more The check engine light information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is comes on to indicate safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper that there is an OBD II pressure. See Tires on page 5-49 for more information. problem and service is required.

3-48 This light comes on briefly, as a check to show it is This light comes on during a malfunction in one of working, when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. If the two ways: light does not come on, see your dealer/retailer. Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could any problem is apparent. Heeding the light can prevent damage the emission control system on your vehicle. more serious damage to your vehicle. This system Diagnosis and service might be required. assists your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. The following can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, the emission controls • Reduce vehicle speed. might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy • Avoid hard accelerations. might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs • Avoid steep uphill grades. that might not be covered by your warranty. • If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of Notice: Modifications made to the engine, cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. with other than those of the same Tire Performance Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous controls and can cause this light to come on. steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon Modifications to these systems could lead to costly as possible. repairs not covered by your warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

3-49 Light On Steady: An emission control system If you experience one or more of these conditions, malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. change the fuel brand you use. It will require at Diagnosis and service might be required. least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. You might be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: If none of the above have made the light turn off, your • Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can ﬁx any mechanical or electrical problems that might have determine if the fuel cap has been left off or developed. improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Programs • If you just drove through a deep puddle of water, Some state/provincial and local governments have or your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. might begin programs to inspect the emission control The condition is usually corrected when the equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this electrical system dries out. A few driving trips inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration. should turn the light off. Here are some things to know to help your vehicle pass • If you recently changed brands of fuel, be sure to an inspection: fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See Gasoline • Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes the check engine light is on or not working properly. engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You might notice this as stalling after start-up, • Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misﬁring, OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on that critical emission control systems have not been acceleration — these conditions might go away completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle once the engine is warmed up. would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery has run down.

3-50 The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate This light comes on brieﬂy critical emission control systems during normal when the engine is started driving. This can take several days of routine as a check to make sure driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still it works. If it does not, does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD the vehicle needs service. system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system { CAUTION: problem. Security Light Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that This light flashes when it catches fire. You or others could be burned. the security system is Check your oil as soon as possible and have activated. your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the For more information, see Theft-Deterrent Systems on maintenance schedule in this manual for changing page 2-21. engine oil.

3-51 Fog Lamp Light Highbeam On Light The fog lamp light will This light comes on when come on when the the high-beam headlamps fog lamps are in use. are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9 See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information. for more information. Cruise Control Light Tow/Haul Mode Light This light comes on This light comes on when whenever the cruise the Tow/Haul mode has control is set. been activated.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-33. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information.

3-52 Fuel Gage When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. • At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually United States Canada took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about The gage goes back to empty when you turn off how much fuel you have left in the fuel tank. • the ignition. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.

3-53 Driver Information Center (DIC) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for the displays available. The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC detected. Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in this section for the displays available. All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the top of the instrument panel cluster. DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was (With DIC Buttons) last displayed before the engine was turned off. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator explains the operation of this system. on the bottom line of the display. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-30 for more The DIC has different displays which can be accessed information. by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel. See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 The outside air temperature also displays on the DIC for more information. when viewing the trip and fuel information. The outside air temperature automatically appears in the top right The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system corner of the DIC display. If there is a problem with information, and warning messages if a system problem the system that controls the temperature display, is detected. the numbers will be replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced.

3-54 The DIC also allows some features to be customized. U (Customization): Press this button to customize the See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle on page 3-74 for more information. Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the information. trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer and trip odometers. T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, park assist on vehicles with this feature, DIC Buttons units, tire pressure readings, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy, timer, fuel used, and average speed.

The buttons are the set/reset, customization, vehicle information, and trip/fuel buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following pages. V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.

3-55 Vehicle Information Menu Items Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display through the following menu items: accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the OIL LIFE next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate PARK ASSIST of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist current oil life remains. The engine oil life system (URPA) system, press the vehicle information button will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent until PARK ASSIST displays. This display allows with your driving conditions. the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select between ON or When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. If you choose OFF, the system will be turned off. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC The URPA system automatically turns back on after Warnings and Messages on page 3-64. You should each vehicle start. When the URPA system is turned off change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC page 5-13. In addition to the engine oil life system will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is a reminder that the system has been turned off. See DIC recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and Ultrasonic manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-44 for more more information. information.

3-56 UNITS RELEARN REMOTE KEY Press the vehicle information button until UNITS This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry displays. This display allows you to select between (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this transmitter to your vehicle: display, press the set/reset button to select between 1. Press the vehicle information button until ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays. will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected. 2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed. FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. the first transmitter at the same time for about The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds 15 seconds. per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT transmitter learned will match driver 1 and TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the the second will match driver 2. vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched. If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you 4. To match additional transmitters at this time, to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the repeat Step 3. display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more transmitters matched to it. information. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a key to LOCK/OFF. value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service. Blank Display This display shows no information.

3-57 Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the following menu items: ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. ODOMETER To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays. set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip This display shows the distance the vehicle has odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle the odometer. begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven To switch between English and metric measurements, 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the see “UNITS” later in this section. retro-active reset feature is activated, the display TRIP A and TRIP B will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. displays. This display shows the current distance If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers display will show the number of miles (mi) or can be used at the same time. Pressing the trip kilometers (km) that were driven during the last odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometers. ignition cycle. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

3-58 RANGE This number is calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays. This item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and display shows the approximate number of remaining hold the set/reset button. miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW if the TIMER fuel level is low. Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the This display can be used as a timer. vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. To start the timer, press the set/reset button while This estimate will change if driving conditions change. TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent of time that has passed since the timer was last stops, this display may read one number, but if reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may continue to be counted as long as the ignition is change even though the same amount of fuel is in the on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC. fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. return to zero. Fuel range cannot be reset. To stop the timer, press the set/reset button brieﬂy while TIMER is displayed. AVG (Average) ECONOMY To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays. button while TIMER is displayed. This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).

3-59 FUEL USED DIC Operation and Displays Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays. (Without DIC Buttons) This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold information below explains the operation of this system. the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed. The DIC has different displays which can be accessed AVG (Average) SPEED by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED displays. reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in messages. miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information, speeds recorded since the last reset of this value. and warning messages if a system problem is detected. To reset the value to zero, press and hold the set/reset If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can button. use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays: odometer, trip odometers, oil life, park Blank Display assist menu for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear This display shows no information. Parking Assist (URPA) system, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, units, and display language. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays: odometer and trip odometers.

3-60 Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to ODOMETER the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds. To switch between English and metric measurements, The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) see “UNITS” later in this section. or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle TRIP A or TRIP B begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP A or mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven TRIP B displays. This display shows the current distance 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since retro-active reset feature is activated, the display the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, can be used at the same time. the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the the desired trip odometer is displayed. vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last ignition cycle.

3-61 OIL LIFE been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate PARK ASSIST of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). current oil life remains. The engine oil life system If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent (URPA) system, press the trip odometer reset stem with your driving conditions. until PARK ASSIST displays. This display allows the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to select OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system will “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be Messages on page 3-64. You should change the oil as turned off. The URPA system automatically turns back soon as you can. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.In on after each vehicle start. When the URPA system addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), additional maintenance is recommended in the the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled as a reminder that the system has been turned off. Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-44 yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. for more information. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just

3-62 RELEARN REMOTE KEY UNITS To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Press the trip odometer reset stem until UNITS Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an displays. This display allows you to select between RKE transmitter to your vehicle: English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN display, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to REMOTE KEY displays. select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the 2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until unit of measurement selected. REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed. 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the DISPLAY LANGUAGE ﬁrst transmitter at the same time for about To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). 15 seconds. This display allows you to select the language in On vehicles with memory recall seats, the ﬁrst which the DIC messages will appear. To select a transmitter learned will match driver 1 and language: the second will match driver 2. 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until DISPLAY A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter LANGUAGE displays. is matched. 2. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset 4. To match additional transmitters at this time, stem to scroll through all of the available languages. repeat Step 3. The available languages are ENGLISH (default), Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and transmitters matched to it. NO CHANGE. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the 3. Once the desired language is displayed, release key to LOCK/OFF. the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.

3-63 DIC Warnings and Messages ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, that the status of the vehicle has changed and that this message displays when there is a compact some action may be needed by the driver to correct the spare tire on the vehicle, when the Antilock Brake condition. Multiple messages may appear one after System (ABS) warning light comes on, or when the rear another. differential ﬂuid is overheating. This message turns off when the differential ﬂuid cools. Some messages may not require immediate action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument The AWD system is disabled until the compact spare panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the warning message panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the is still on after putting on the full-size tire, you need to messages and to clear them from the display. reset the warning message. To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on again Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC after 30 seconds. If the message stays on, see your display because they are more urgent. These messages dealer/retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) require action before they can be cleared. You should System on page 4-9 for more information. take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. This message displays when the automatic headlamps The following are the possible messages that can be are turned off. This message clears itself after displayed and some information about them. 10 seconds.

3-64 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This message displays when the automatic headlamps This message displays when the pressure in one or are turned on. This message clears itself after more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. 10 seconds. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other This message displays when the system detects that messages that may have been sent at the same the battery voltage is dropping below expected time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer levels. The battery saver system starts reducing certain reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice. DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures At the point that the features are disabled, this message checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to Information label. See Tires on page 5-49, Loading the save the charge in the battery. Vehicle on page 4-22, and Inﬂation - Tire Pressure Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery on page 5-56. The DIC also shows the tire pressure to recharge. values. See “DIC Operation and Displays (With The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-48. This message displays when the engine oil needs to be CRUISE SET TO XXX changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. This message displays whenever the cruise control See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information is set. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on information. page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.

3-65 DRIVER DOOR OPEN ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for If an overheat warning appears on the instrument obstructions, and close the door again. Check to panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as see if the message still appears on the DIC. possible. Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating ENGINE HOT A/C on page 5-23 for more information. (Air Conditioning) OFF This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to This message displays when the engine coolant idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. Temperature Gage on page 3-47. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-47. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on conditioning compressor automatically turns off. page 5-25 for information on driving to a safe place When the coolant temperature returns to normal, in an emergency. the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your vehicle. ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE If this message continues to appear, have the system Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. to avoid damage to the engine. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23 for more information.

3-66 This message displays and a continuous chime FUEL LEVEL LOW sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel This message clears when the engine has cooled Gage on page 3-53 and Fuel on page 5-5 for more to a safe operating temperature. information. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED HEATED WASH (Washer) FLUID SYSTEM OFF This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine This message displays when you manually turn off the further enters the engine coolant protection mode. heated windshield washer ﬂuid system or when the See Engine Overheating on page 5-23 for further system automatically turns off. See “Heated Windshield information. Washer” under Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine more information. This message clears itself after power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the 10 seconds. vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may This message displays when you turn on the heated be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, windshield washer ﬂuid system. See “Heated Windshield but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime Washer” under Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken more information. to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

3-67 HOOD OPEN OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE This message displays and a chime sounds if the Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the again. Check to see if the message still appears on Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle the DIC. as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information. This message displays when the outside air temperature This message displays if low oil pressure levels is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and driving accordingly. do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in PARK ASSIST OFF a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started and shifted out of PARK (P), this message displays to LIFTGATE OPEN remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned off. Press the set/reset button or the trip odometer This message displays and a chime sounds if the reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on, the vehicle and check the liftgate. Restart the vehicle see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on and check for the message on the DIC display. page 2-44.

3-68 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, the door for obstructions, and close the door again. check the door for obstructions, and close the door Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning) This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. SYSTEM See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under This message displays when the electronic sensors that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation control the air conditioning and heating systems are on page 2-5 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC no longer working. Have the climate control system Buttons) on page 3-54 or DIC Operation and Displays serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-60 for more heating and air conditioning efficiency. information. REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” page 3-40 and Airbag System on page 1-64 for under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation more information. on page 2-5.

3-69 SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, This message displays along with the brake system this message displays if there is a problem with this warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. system. If this message appears, stop as soon as See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45. If this possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off after 30 seconds and check for the message on the the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears message on the DIC display. If the message is still again when you begin driving, the AWD system displayed or appears again when you begin driving, needs service. See your dealer/retailer. the brake system needs service as soon as possible. See your dealer/retailer. SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM SERVICE PARK ASSIST On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist problem with the battery charging system. Under certain (URPA) system, this message displays if there is a conditions, the charging system light may also turn on problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Light on page 3-43. Driving with this problem could drain (URPA) on page 2-44 for more information. See your the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. dealer/retailer for service. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. SERVICE POWER STEERING See your dealer/retailer. This message displays when a problem is detected with the power steering system. When this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.

3-70 SERVICE STABILITRAK SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM This message displays if there is a problem with the This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure StabiliTrak® system. If this message appears, try Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least pressure light also ﬂashes and then remains on during 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on message still comes on, it means there is a problem. page 3-48. Several conditions may cause this message See your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is safe to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on to drive, however, you do not have the beneﬁt of page 5-59 for more information. If the warning comes on StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. accordingly. See your dealer/retailer. SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when there is a problem with This message displays when there is a problem with the the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not Traction Control System (TCS). When this message restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your is displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer ¨ PASS-Key¨ III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation on for service. See StabiliTrak System on page 4-6 for page 2-24 for more information. more information. SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays when there is a problem with the transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.

3-71 SERVICE VEHICLE SOON TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message displays when a non-emissions related This message may display along with the check engine malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-48. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H) See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off This message displays when your vehicle speed is or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few detects a problem in the speed variable assist driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn steering system. Have your vehicle serviced by your this light and message off. dealer/retailer. STARTING DISABLED SERVICE TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE THROTTLE This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. serviced by your dealer/retailer. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-63, THEFT ATTEMPTED Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-58, and Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 for more This message displays if the content theft-deterrent information. system has detected a break-in attempt while you were away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22 for more information.

3-72 TRACTION CONTROL OFF TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays when the Traction Control This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn accordingly. See StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-6 signal/multifunction lever to the off position. for more information. This message clears itself after 10 seconds. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview transmission fluid is overheating and the on page 5-12 for the location of the windshield transmission temperature warning is displayed on washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you Fluid on page 5-33 for more information. can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed. This message displays and a chime sounds if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message clears when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.

3-73 DIC Vehicle Customization Entering the Feature Settings Menu (With DIC Buttons) 1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in PARK (P). Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is allow you to program certain features to one preferred recommended that the headlamps are turned off. setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed 2. Press the customization button to enter the feature to a preferred setting for two different drivers. settings menu. All of the customization options may not be available If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS on your vehicle. Only the options available will be AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering displayed on the DIC. the menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P). The default settings for the customization features were Feature Settings Menu Items set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since then. The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle: The customization preferences are automatically recalled. DISPLAY IN ENGLISH To change customization preferences, use the This feature will only display if a language other than following procedure. English has been set. This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English. Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to display all DIC messages in English.

3-74 DISPLAY LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the language in which This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s the DIC messages will appear. doors will automatically lock. See Programmable Press the customization button until the DISPLAY Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press information. the set/reset button once to access the settings for Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR this feature. Then press the customization button LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset to scroll through the following settings: button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in the following settings: English. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish. PARK (P). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock The current setting will remain. when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in desired setting is displayed on the DIC. this section for more information.

3-75 AUTO DOOR UNLOCK REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn This feature allows you to select the type of feedback off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also you will receive when locking the vehicle with the allows you to select which doors and when the doors Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information. transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR feature. Then press the customization button to scroll LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset through the following settings: button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. the following settings: DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. lock button on the RKE transmitter. DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press the key is taken out of the ignition. of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter, NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed The current setting will remain. again within five seconds of the previous command. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. desired setting is displayed on the DIC. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-76 REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback This feature allows you to select whether or not the you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed. the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will When locking the doors and liftgate with the power not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear on page 2-5 for more information. three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR this feature to work. You can temporarily override UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch set/reset button once to access the settings for this twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice. feature. Then press the customization button to scroll See Delayed Locking on page 2-11 for more information. through the following settings: Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings for this feature. LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash Then press the customization button to scroll through when you press the unlock button on the RKE the following settings: transmitter. OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s doors. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-77 EXIT LIGHTING APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you This feature allows you to select whether or not to have want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark the exterior lights turn on brieﬂy during low light enough outside. This happens after the key is turned periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING Press the customization button until APPROACH appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the once to access the settings for this feature. Then set/reset button once to access the settings for press the customization button to scroll through the this feature. Then press the customization button to following settings: scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. 30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior lights will turn on brieﬂy when you unlock the vehicle 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for with the RKE transmitter. one minute. The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is two minutes. no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-78 CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS This feature allows you to select the volume level of If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select the chime. whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 2-42 for button once to access the settings for this feature. more information. Then press the customization button to scroll through Press the customization button until PARK TILT the following settings: MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a this feature. Then press the customization button to normal level. scroll through the following settings: LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into There is no default for chime volume. The volume will REVERSE (R). stay at the last known setting. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside desired setting is displayed on the DIC. mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-79 EASY EXIT SEAT MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. your preference for the remote memory seat recall See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for more feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for information. more information. Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset once to access the settings for this feature. Then button once to access the settings for this feature. press the customization button to scroll through the Then press the customization button to scroll through following settings: the following settings: OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur. OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur. ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will is removed from the ignition. automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur (RKE) transmitter is pressed. See “Relearn Remote one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC automatic movement has already occurred, and you put Buttons) on page 3-54 or DIC Operation and Displays the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-60 for more information will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers. recall took place prior to removing the key again. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-80 REMOTE START FACTORY SETTINGS If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the This feature allows you to set all of the customization remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows features back to their factory default settings. you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using Press the customization button until FACTORY the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for more information. set/reset button once to access the settings for Press the customization button until REMOTE START this feature. Then press the customization button to appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset scroll through the following settings: button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features the following settings: will be set to their factory default settings. OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this desired setting is displayed on the DIC. feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

3-81 EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS Audio System(s) This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu. Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read Press the customization button until FEATURE the pages following to familiarize yourself with its SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC features. display. Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu. If you do not exit, pressing the customization button { again will return you to the beginning of the feature CAUTION: settings menu. This system provides you with far greater Exiting the Feature Settings Menu access to audio stations and song listings. The feature settings menu will be exited when any of Giving extended attention to entertainment the following occurs: tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed. Always keep • The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P). your eyes on the road and your mind on the • The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN. drive — avoid engaging in extended searching • The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are while driving. pressed. • The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited. • A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.

3-82 Keeping your mind on the drive is important for Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to safe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, Here are some ways in which you can help avoid CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make distraction while driving. sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering While your vehicle is parked: mobile radio and telephone units. If sound • Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. equipment can be added, it is very important to do • Familiarize yourself with its operation. it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or • Set up your audio system by presetting your other systems, and even damage them. Your favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving of sound equipment that has been added. conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory radio stations using the presets and steering wheel Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be controls if the vehicle has them. played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27 for more information.

3-83 Setting the Clock Changing the Time and Date Default Settings MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a To change the time default setting from 12 hour to Single CD and DVD Player 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and instructions: DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the 1. Press the clock button and then the pushbutton time and date. located under the forward arrow that is currently 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or RUN. displayed on the radio screen until the time Press the power knob, located in the center of the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD radio, to turn the radio on. (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) 2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, displays. YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired 3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the option. labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is 3. Press the clock button again to apply the selected pressed again, the time or the date if selected, default, or let the screen time out. increases by one. • Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the \ FWD (forward) button. • To decrease the time or date, press the left ©SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse) button, or turn the f knob, located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.

3-84 MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player Changing the Time and Date Default Settings If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the radio has a MENU button instead of the H (clock) To change the time default setting from 12 hour to button to set the time and date. 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these To set the time and date, follow these instructions: instructions: 1. Press the MENU button. 1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option 2. Once the clock option displays, press the pushbutton displays, press the pushbutton located under the located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, forward arrow that is currently displayed on YYYY displays. the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) 3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the and DD/MM (day and month) displays. labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired increases by one. option. • Another way to increase the time or date, 3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or default, or let the screen time out. the \ FWD (forward) button. • To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button, or turn the tune knob, located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.

3-85 Radio(s) (MP3)

Radio with CD and DVD

Radio with CD shown, Radio with The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system. Six-Disc CD similar

3-86 Radios with CD and DVD Playing the Radio Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on Sound System. Some of its features are explained and off. later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or (Balance/Fade)”. decrease the volume. If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The Speed Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 for more Compensated Volume (SCV) feature automatically information on the vehicle’s RSE system. adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. That way, the volume level should sound about The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed the same. DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital To activate SCV: Theater Systems, Inc.). 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of setup menu. Dolby Laboratories. 3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM Radio Data System (RDS) (automatic volume) label on the radio display. The Radio Data System (RDS) feature is available for 4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, This system relies upon receiving speciﬁc information or High) to select the level of radio volume from these stations and only works when the information compensation. Press the pushbutton located below is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS the BACK label on the MENU SETUP display or let station, the station name or call letters display. In rare the display time out after approximately 10 seconds. cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect Each higher setting allows for more radio volume information that causes the radio features to work compensation at faster vehicle speeds. improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

3-87 Finding a Station Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite

BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™ Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station (if equipped). The selection displays. favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations. wheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons to the next station and stay there. positioned below the radio station frequency labels and To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a Press to go through up to six pages of favorites, station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the each having six favorite stations available per page. next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations. The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations. 4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, To store a station as a favorite, perform the and RDS Features): Press to display additional following steps: text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information 1. Tune to the desired radio station. such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where to can display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired store the station. label, or press the pushbutton positioned under any one 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a of the labels and the information about that label displays. beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed When information is not available, No Info displays. and released, the station that was set, returns. 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station to be stored as a favorite.

3-88 The number of favorites pages can be setup using the setting, or press either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages, or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels perform the following steps: are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio is static, decrease the treble. setup menu. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle FAV 1-6 label. position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds. 3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle pressing the pushbutton located below the position. displayed page numbers. To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the 4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to f return to the original main radio screen showing the middle position, press the knob for more than radio station frequency labels and to begin the two seconds until a beep sounds. process of programming favorites for the chosen EQ (Equalization): Press to choose bass and treble amount of numbered pages. equalization settings designed for different types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk, jazz, Setting the Tone and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass (Bass/Midrange/Treble) or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings. BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source. the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton are either MANUAL or TALK. positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted

3-89 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Finding a Category (CAT) Station

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™ fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired XM™ channels within a desired category, perform label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the following: the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or 1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting, or displays. Press the CAT button to display the press either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays. until the desired levels are obtained. • Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, s press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or category list by pressing the REV button or FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds the \ FWD button. and the level adjusts to the middle position. 2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the category label to immediately tune to the first middle position, press the f knob for more than XM™ station associated with that category. two seconds until a beep sounds. 3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right Radios with CD and DVD differ when using fade in or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow 5.1 Surround. The left front and right front speakers fade to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station rearward, leaving the center front speaker unaffected within the selected category. until the last fade step, then all front speakers mute. 4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV button or BAND button to display the If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio favorites again. disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.

3-90 Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through Radio Messages the setup menu. To remove an undesired category, perform the following: Calibration Error: The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio Error displays, it means that the radio has not been setup menu. conﬁgured properly for the vehicle and it must be 2. Press the pushbutton located below the returned to your dealer/retailer for service. XM CAT label. Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK® 3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your removed. dealer/retailer for service. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be label until the category name along with the word corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. Removed displays. 5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories. XM™ Satellite Radio Service Removed categories can be restored by pressing the XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming under the Restore All label. and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you Categories cannot be removed or added while the subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

3-91 Radio Messages for XM™ Only To insert multiple CDs, do the following: See XM Radio Messages on page 3-114 later in this 1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. section for further detail. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. 2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert Playing a CD (Single CD Player) the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The 3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. more CDs. Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player. To insert a CD with the ignition off, ﬁrst press This CD player holds up to six CDs. the Z button or the DISP knob. To insert one CD, do the following: If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio 1. Press and release the ^ button. is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, 2. Wait for the message to insert the disc. if it was the last selected audio source. 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. label side up. The player pulls the CD in. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays.

3-92 Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or Care of CDs and DVDs CD Slot) If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. the quality of the music that has been recorded, and The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. (loading a disc into the system, depending on media Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, their original cases or other protective cases and and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing). away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs faceplate or by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole (RSA) on page 3-124 for more information. The DVD/CD and the outer edge. decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible with cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs. detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD symbol Make sure the wiping process starts from the center displays on the left side of the radio display. As each to the edge. new track starts to play, the track number displays.

3-93 Care of the CD and DVD Player For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for two seconds to eject all discs. Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc computer and a description label is needed, try labeling that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. and Ejecting Disc displays. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed, to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism. press and hold for more than five seconds to force Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than the disc to eject. one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, currently playing. the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without ©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign CD have played. Press the right arrow to go to the materials, liquids, and debris. next track. If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this section. For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to eject on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from the CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the a radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom slot. right arrow to go to the next track. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc can If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the be removed. If the disc is not removed, after player continues moving backward or forward through several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back the tracks on the CD. into the player.

3-94 s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep reduced volume. Release to resume playing the sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or track. The elapsed time of the track displays. more discs partway into the slot of the CD player. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a player in random order, press the pushbutton reduced volume. Release to resume playing the positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All track. The elapsed time of the track displays. Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio can be listened to in random, rather than sequential with CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc To use random, do one of the following: partway into the slot. A RDM label displays. • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD To play tracks from a single CD in random order, player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM player. A RDM label displays. label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the To play the tracks from the single CD in random pushbutton again to turn off random play. order, press the pushbutton positioned under BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. the RDM label until Random Current Disc The CD remains inside the radio for future listening. displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play. For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment.

3-95 CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing the disc and/or track number displays when a Only one audio source can be heard through the CD is in the player. Press again and the system speakers at one time. An audio source is deﬁned as automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is or Rear Auxiliary Jack. not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays. Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle be heard through all of the vehicle speakers. through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM, the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX showing the track or chapter number displays when a button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary disc is in either slot. Press this button again and input (if available). the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot passengers are able to listen to playback from this source the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on button cycles through all available options, such page 3-115 for more information. as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” speakers can be muted when the RSA power is later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-124 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 for more information. for more information. If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the remote control.

3-96 Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT CD-RW Disc problems. • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to The radio has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA normal, the CD should play. CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using • The road is very rough. When the road becomes an MP3” in the index. smoother, the CD should play. CD Messages • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or try again. radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC • There could have been a problem while burning and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs. the CD. Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other • The label could be caught in the CD player. messages when an error occurs: If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down. try a known good CD. Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid Radios with a CD and DVD player displays: or unknown format. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

3-97 Using the DVD Player Playing a DVD The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 showing track or chapter number displays when a disc and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-124 for more is in either slot. Press this button again and the information. system automatically searches for an auxiliary input The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” most DVDs. displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 button cycles through all available options, such as: and WMA formats. DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary If an error message displays on the video screen or the (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under, later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for for more information. more information. O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system and to start the parental control feature.

3-98 Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio remote control. displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. fast reversing, press again. This button might not work The parental control feature remains on until you press when the DVD is playing the copyright information or and hold for more than two seconds again, or until the previews. the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See forwarding, press again. This button might not work the information given earlier in this section specific to the when the DVD is playing the copyright information or radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Clock” the previews. in the index, for setting the clock and date. Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD ©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player SEEK arrow to return to the start of the current track or automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds. chapter. Press the left SEEK arrow again to go to If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, the previous track or chapter. This button might not work because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to when the DVD is playing the copyright information or eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to the previews. force the disc to eject. SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow to go to the next track or chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

3-99 DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu If the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the instructions, if available. pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast more information. forwarding a DVD. The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are menus and controls through the remote control. highlighted in any menu. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 for more information. y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD The Video Screen automatically turns on when menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot. located under the navigation arrows to navigate r j the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a / (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause selection press this button. This button only operates icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between when using a DVD. pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the navigating through the menus. system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, q press the play button to turn the screen on. (Return): Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu. This button operates Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active. ﬁnished, although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the

3-100 DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus. Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio pushbuttons located under any desired tag option stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, screen shows the audio stream changing. for more information. The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus Inserting a Disc and controls through the remote control. See “Remote To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not on page 3-115 for more information. The Video Screen accept some paper labeled media. The player starts does not automatically power on when the DVD-A loading the disc into the system and show “Loading is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio on by the rear seat occupant through the remote displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs control power button. automatically play the movie while others default to r j the softkey menu display, which requires the Play, Enter, / (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause or Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by softkey icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between or by the rear seat passenger using the remote pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the control. forward arrow is showing on the display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the Loading a disc into the system, depending on media display, the system is in playback mode. type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD. q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

3-101 Stopping and Resuming Playback resume play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, into the DVD player begins to play again. In case press the c button on the remote control, or press the loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is eject, press and hold the DVD Z button more than sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the ﬁve seconds to force the disc to eject. DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source. To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button DVD Radio Error Messages on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the Player Error: This message displays when there are radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last disc load or eject problems. stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop the disc is damaged. button has been pressed twice on the remote control, the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc. Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc is not from a correct region. Ejecting a Disc Z No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is Press the button on the radio to eject the disc. present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, pressed on the radio. the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not

3-102 Using the Auxiliary Input Jack BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio device The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on continues playing, so you might want to stop it or the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio turn it off. output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. Connect an external audio device CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD portable audio device is playing. Press again and player, or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary input the system begins playing audio from the connected jack for use as another source for audio listening. portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays. Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle Driving on page 4-2 for more information on driver through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to distraction. the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm showing track or chapter number displays when a (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. disc is in either slot. Press again and the system When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, button to begin playing audio from the device over such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio the vehicle speakers. player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player. and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front Additional volume adjustments might have to be made auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button from the portable device if the volume is not loud or cycles through all available options, such as: DVD soft enough. slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 for more information.

3-103 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and • The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of Six-Disc CD Player) 512 folders and files. MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a using one folder for each album. Each folder CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with or album should contain 18 songs or less. the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and the complexity and confusion in trying to locate album are available for display by the radio when a particular folder during playback. recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2. • Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension Compressed Audio (other file extensions might not work). The radio also plays discs that contain both • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a files. By default the radio shows the MP3 label on combination of a large number of files and folders, the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in or playlists could cause the player to be unable the order in which they were recorded to the disc. to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, MP3/WMA Format playlists, or sessions. To play a large number of files, folders, playlists or sessions, minimize Creating an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer: the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. • Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on Long names also take up more space on the display, potentially getting cut off. a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files • Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to on one disc. add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player.

3-104 Change playlists by using the S c (previous) and Empty Directory or Folder c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was file structure that contains only folders/subfolders recorded using no file folders can be played. If a and no compressed files directly beneath them, CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum the player advances to the next folder in the file of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of structure that contains compressed audio files. 512 folders and files, the player accesses and navigates The empty folder does not display. up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible. No Folder Root Directory When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only compressed files, the files are located under the root The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as folder. The next and previous folder function does a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio not display on a CD-R or CD-RW disc that was recorded files, the directory displays as the CD label. All without folders or playlists. files contained directly under the root directory are When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only playlists accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders are located under the root folder. The folder down and or files. up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then goes If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) to the root folder. and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.

3-105 Order of Play Preprogrammed Playlists Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc are played Preprogrammed playlists that were created using in the following order: WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special and continues sequentially through all tracks in folders containing compressed audio song files. each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of Playing an MP3/WMA the first playlist. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc partway into the slot • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and (Single CD Player), or press the load button and wait for continues sequentially through all tracks in each the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label folder. When the last track of the last folder has side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW played, play continues from the first track of the should begin playing. first folder. Z When play enters a new folder, the display does not EJECT: Press and hold this button for two seconds automatically show the new folder name unless to eject all discs, if one or more discs are loaded. the folder mode is chosen as the default display. f The new track name displays. (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing. File System and Naming ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the The song name that displays is the song name that is start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. held or pressed multiple times, the player continues Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of on the CD. text and the extension of the filename does not display.

3-106 S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in in the previous folder. random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW disc or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned random, do one of the following: under the Folder label to go to the first track in the • To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW next folder. in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. off random play. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of • To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD the file displays. player in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. to turn off random play. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator the file displays. feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

3-107 Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display DVD Player) between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. To listen to Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbutton The radio also plays discs that contain both located below either arrow button. The player goes uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order. files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. Continue pressing either button until the desired artist By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio is displayed. (.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD To change from playback by artist to playback by deck. On the CD deck, pressing the CAT (category) album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By button toggles between compressed and uncompressed label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons audio format, the default being the uncompressed below the album button. Press the pushbutton below format (.CDA). the back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name is displayed on the MP3/WMA Format second line between the arrows and songs from the To create an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer: current album begins to play. Once all songs from that Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on album are played, the player moves to the next • album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and a CD-R or CD-RW disc. begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album. • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on one disc. To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA • The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play playback. a maximum combination of 512 files and folders. The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read 255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.

3-108 • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find Root Directory songs while driving. Organize songs by albums The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW disc is treated using one folder for each album. Each folder as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio or album should contain 18 songs or less. files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to contained directly under the root directory are accessed eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce are always accessed before root folders or files. the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. Empty Directory or Folder • Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the extension as other file extensions might not work. file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them, the player • Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist advances to the next folder in the file structure names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder a combination of a large number of files and folders, does not display. or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, No Folder playlists, or sessions. To play a large number When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the compressed files, the files are located under the root length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long folder. The next and previous folder function does names also take up more space on the display, not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded potentially getting cut off. without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of • Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to the folder the radio displays ROOT. add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player.

3-109 When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only playlists File System and Naming and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the root folder. The folder down and The song name that is displayed is the song name that the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not then goes to the root folder. When the radio displays present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT. name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Order of Play Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc are played are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of in the following order: text and the extension of the filename displays. • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist Preprogrammed Playlists and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist Preprogrammed playlists that were created using has played, play continues from the first track of WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software the first playlist. can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and folders containing compressed audio song files. continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder. When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display. The new track name displays.

3-110 Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, or CD Slot) such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more than five seconds Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc partway into either the to force the disc to eject. top or bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing. Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order), Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or The CD-R or CD-RW disc can be removed. If the CD-R down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has or CD-RW disc is not removed, after several seconds, a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a the CD-R or CD-RW disc automatically pulls back Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot softkey only or the menu as previously described. be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. CD-RW disc in the player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned back on, the CD-R or f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing. selected audio source. As each new track starts to play, the track number and ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the song title displays. start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file. bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The the player continues moving backward or forward CD-R or CD-RW disc can be removed. If the CD-R through the MP3/WMA files on the CD. or CD-RW disc is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW disc automatically pulls back into the player. 3-111 S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in the previous folder. in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 under the Folder label to go to the first track in the tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the next folder. disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning, Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this press the pushbutton located below the music button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of navigator label or eject the disc. the file displays. The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc \ in the background. When the scan is finished, the FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again. advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current the file displays. artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA another artist, press the pushbutton located below either files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in arrow button. The disc goes to the next or previous random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press button until the desired artist is displayed. the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play.

3-112 To change from playback by artist to playback by album, DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label showing track or chapter number displays when a disc to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the is in either slot. Press this button again and the album name displays on the second line between the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input arrows and songs from the current album begin to play. device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable Once all songs from that album are played, the player audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA ﬁles the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two from that album. sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton button cycles through all available options, such as: below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary playback. (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115 the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment. for more information. If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only).

3-113 XM Radio Messages No CAT Info: No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or properly. any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, No Information: No text or informational messages are by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). available at this time on this channel. The system is XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is working properly. being updated, and no action is required. This process CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for should take no longer than 30 seconds. the selected category. The system is working properly. No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ could have previously been in another vehicle. For signal. When you move into an open area, the signal security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped should return. between vehicles. If this message appears after having Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer. processing audio and text data. No action is needed. XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message This message should disappear shortly. alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label. Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in This label is needed to activate the service. service. Tune to another channel. Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this with your dealer/retailer. station was one of the presets, choose another station Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear for that preset button. within a short period of time, the receiver could have a No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer. time on this channel. The system is working properly. XM Not Available: If this message does not clear No Title Info: No song title information is available within a short period of time, the receiver could have a at this time on this channel. The system is working fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer. properly.

3-114 Navigation/Radio System Before Driving Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system. The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen The navigation system has built-in features intended to while driving and should not try to do so. minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no matter how advanced, can never replace your own In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some system might or might not work until the temperature is tips to help you reduce distractions while driving. within the operating range. The operating range for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of the vehicle is Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the System temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system. The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works with the Parental Control vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature, front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button two wireless headphones, and a remote control. for more than two seconds to stop all system features See Radio(s) (MP3) on page 3-86 for more information such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system. While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays. When the radio is turned back on, Parental Control is unlocked.

3-115 Headphones Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If the light does not come on, the batteries might need to be replaced. Intermittent sound or static on the headphones can also be an indication of weak batteries. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. Moving too far forward or stepping out of the vehicle, can cause the headphones lose the audio signal. The headphones automatically turns off after four hours of continuous use. To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones volume control located on the right side. that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is For optimal audio performance, the headphones must dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on are used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio, any auxiliary source positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones be positioned on the right ear. have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. Switch the headphones to Off when not in use.

3-116 Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty. Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place. If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Headphones should be stored in the front ﬂoor console and not in the front seat back pocket. Headphone damage can occur when the second row seats are folded forward. Battery Replacement The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the ﬂoor console, allow audio or video signals to be connected from To change the batteries on the headphones, do the an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video following: game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors 1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located or cables (not supplied) might be required to connect on the left side of the headphones. Slide the the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the battery door open. manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left 3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw. audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input. If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, radio system. dry place.

3-117 To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, Audio Output connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be video screen power on. If the video screen is in the heard through the following possible sources: DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button • Wireless Headphones on the remote control, switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. • Vehicle Speakers The radio can listen to the audio of the connected • Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) audio system, if the vehicle has this feature. (MP3) on page 3-86 for more information. The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to How to Change the RSE Video Screen the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. Settings See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more information. The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the feature, do the following: vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be selected as an audio source on the RSA system. 1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-124 for more control. information. 2. Use the remote control n ,q, p , o (navigation When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the arrows) and the r (enter) button to use the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from setup menu. the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired 3. Press the display menu button again to remove the headphones. The front seat passengers are able to setup menu from the screen. listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.

3-118 Video Screen Remote Control The video screen is located in the overhead console. To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter To use the video screen, do the following: window at the rear of the overhead console and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light 1. Push the release button located on the overhead could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive console. signals from the remote control. If the remote control 2. Move the screen to the desired position. does not seem to be working, the batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also locked position. affect the function of the remote control. If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote position, the screen remains on; this is normal, and control O button can be used to turn on the video the DVD continues to play through the previous audio P Z screen display and start the disc. The radio can also source. Use the remote control button or the disc turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) (MP3) on to turn off the screen. page 3-86 for more information. The overhead console contains the infrared receivers Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs for the remote control. They are located at the rear will not be covered by your warranty. Storage in of the console. extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, the remote control stored in a cool, dry place. as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video Screen” later in this section for more information.

3-119 Remote Control Buttons y (Main Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD.

n,q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu. r (Enter): Press to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust the brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu. This button operates O (Power): Press to turn the video screen on and off. only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active.

P (Illumination): Press to turn the remote control c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or backlight on. The backlight automatically times out after fast forwarding a DVD. Press twice to return to the seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed beginning of the DVD. while the backlight is on. v (Title): Press to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for each disc.

3-120 s (Play/Pause): Press to start playing a DVD. [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the DVD or Press while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press again to CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press continue playing the DVD. the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This button When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, play might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright may be slowed down by pressing the play/pause button information or the previews. then pressing the [ (fast forward) button. The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode. Depending on the e (Audio): Press to change audio tracks on DVDs that radio, perform reverse slow play by pressing the play/ have this feature when the DVD is playing. The format pause button and then pressing the fast forward button. and content of this function vary for each disc. To cancel slow play mode, press the play/pause button. { (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to the move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing. start of the current track or chapter. Press again to go to The format and content of this function vary for the previous track or chapter. This button might not each disc. work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the beginning d of the next chapter or track. This button might not (Camera): Press to change camera angles on work when the DVD is playing the copyright information DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing. or the previews. The format and content of this function vary for each disc. r (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the DVD 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, press provides the capability of direct chapter or track the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a DVD number selection. audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

3-121 \ (Clear): Press within three seconds after entering a Problem Recommended Action numeric selection, to clear all numerical inputs. No power. The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or in } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter ACC/ACCESSORY. or track numbers greater than nine. Press this button The picture does not ﬁll Check the display mode before entering the number. the screen. There are settings in the setup menu If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new black borders on the by pressing the display top and bottom or on menu button on the universal remote control can be purchased. If this both sides or it looks remote control. happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a stretched out. code set of Toshiba®. In auxiliary mode, the Check the auxiliary input picture moves or scrolls. connections at both Battery Replacement devices. To change the remote control batteries, do the following: The remote control does Check to make sure there 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the remote control. not work. is no obstruction between the remote control and the 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. transmitter window. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using Check the batteries to the diagram on the inside of the battery make sure they are not compartment. dead or installed incorrectly. 3. Replace the battery cover. After stopping the player, If the stop button was If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes dry place. off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD beginning. was stopped. If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.

3-122 Problem Recommended Action DVD Display Error Messages The auxiliary source is Check that the RSE video The DVD display error message depends on which running but there is no screen is in the auxiliary radio the vehicle has. The video screen might display picture or sound. source mode. Check the auxiliary input one of the following: connections at both Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when devices. there are disc load or eject problems. Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions, headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc or buzzes. range, and interference is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if from cellular telephone the disc is damaged. towers or by using a cellular telephone in Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc the vehicle. is not from a correct region. Check that the headphones are on No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is correctly using the L (left) Z and R (right) on the present when the EJECT button is pressed on headphones. the radio. I lost the remote and/or See your dealer/retailer the headphones. for assistance. The DVD is playing, Check that the RSE video but there is no picture or screen is sourced to the sound. DVD player.

3-123 DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Video distortion can occur when operating cellular This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies. or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when passengers can only control the music sources the front operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. seat passengers are not listening to (except on some ® radios where dual control is allowed). For example, *Excludes the OnStar System. rear seat passengers can control a CD and listen to it through the headphones, while the driver listens to Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, headphones. use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is Cleaning the Video Screen off. The front audio system will display the headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear from Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. the display when it is off. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result. Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If the vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones. The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the RSA audio is active through the headphones.

3-124 To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the and rear auxiliary. front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button. ©¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press either the seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold either seek arrow until the display ﬂashes, to tune to an individual station. The display stops ﬂashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. While listening to a disc, press the right seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press the left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front or off. seat passengers are listening to the disc. Volume: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease the When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the the left headphones and the right knob controls the menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left right headphones. or right on the menu.

3-125 PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next Audio Steering Wheel Controls preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the Vehicles with audio front seat passengers are listening to the radio. steering wheel controls could differ depending on When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this your vehicle’s options. button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. Some audio controls can This function is inactive, with some radios, if the be adjusted at the steering front seat passengers are listening to the disc. wheel. They include the When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, following: press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the PROG button to perform the menu function, enter. xw(Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow to Theft-Deterrent Feature go to the next or to the previous radio station stored THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the as a favorite. vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by When a CD/DVD is playing, press either arrow to go to learning a portion of the Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number the next or previous track or chapter. (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could display. g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this With THEFTLOCK activated, the radio does not operate button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio if stolen. of the wireless and wired headphones, if your vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and release this button again, to turn the sound on.

3-126 If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and Radio Reception hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Frequency interference and static can occur during Navigation System manual for more information. normal radio reception if items such as cell phone

® chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external If your vehicle has OnStar , press and hold this button electronic devices are plugged into the accessory for longer than one second to interact with the ® power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the OnStar system. If your vehicle also has the navigation item from the accessory power outlet. system, press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” AM to enter OnStar® mode. See the OnStar¨ System on page 2-47 in this manual for more information. The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between station frequencies to interfere with each other. the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and the power levels during the day, and then reduce rear auxiliary. these levels during the night. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio + e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on button to increase or to decrease the radio volume. the radio. ¨(Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio FM Stereo station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the seek reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the player, if multiple discs are loaded. sound to fade in and out.

3-127 XM™ Satellite Radio Service Multi-Band Antenna XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United vehicle. This type of antenna is used with the AM/FM States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite Radio hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing Service System, if the vehicle has these features. the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or clear radio reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, through tunnels could cause loss of the XM signal for a the performance of the radio system may be affected if period of time. The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL the sunroof is open. Loading items onto the roof of to indicate interference. the vehicle can interfere with the performance of the radio system and, if the vehicle has this feature, OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is not obstructed.

3-128 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ...... 4-2 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ...... 4-14 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ...... 4-16 Drunk Driving ...... 4-2 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-16 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-16 Braking ...... 4-4 Winter Driving ...... 4-17 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...... 4-5 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-6 Ice, or Snow ...... 4-21 StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ...... 4-22 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ...... 4-9 Loading the Vehicle ...... 4-22 Steering ...... 4-9 Towing ...... 4-27 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-12 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 4-27 Passing ...... 4-12 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...... 4-27 Loss of Control ...... 4-12 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-31 Driving at Night ...... 4-14

4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Drunk Driving the Vehicle { CAUTION: Defensive Driving Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Defensive driving means “always expect the Your reﬂexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and unexpected.” The ﬁrst step in driving defensively is to judgment can be affected by even a small wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-18. amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who { CAUTION: has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is they might do and be ready. In addition: a global tragedy. • Allow enough following distance between Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a you and the driver in front of you. vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and • Focus on the task of driving. attentiveness. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.

4-2 Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor Control of a Vehicle vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking The following three systems help to control your vehicle and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured. ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of For persons under 21, it is against the law in every ¨ U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, your vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on page 4-6. psychological, and developmental reasons for Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect these laws. your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

4-3 Braking Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45. braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool Braking action involves perception time and reaction between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, up your foot and do it. That is reaction time. you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a That means better braking and longer brake life. second. But that is only an average. It might be less If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving, with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, engine stops, you will still have some power brake drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an the brake pedal will be harder to push. emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

4-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an most of available tire and road conditions. This can advanced electronic braking system that will help help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. prevent a braking skid. As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates When you start the engine and begin to drive away, on wheel speed and controls braking pressure ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary accordingly. motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to you might even notice that the brake pedal moves get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease a little. This is normal. stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes If there is a problem with if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave ABS, this warning light will enough room up ahead to stop, even though you stay on. See Antilock Brake have ABS. System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-46. Using ABS Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down ﬁrmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-5 Braking in Emergencies StabiliTrak® System With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. Your vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines In many emergencies, steering can help you more than antilock brake, traction and stability control systems even the very best braking. and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions. Panic Brake Assist When you ﬁrst start your vehicle and begin to drive Your vehicle has a Panic Brake Assist feature designed away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses system working. This is normal and does not mean there the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) hydraulic brake is a problem with your vehicle. The system should control module to supplement the power brake system initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). under conditions where the driver has quickly and In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly driving before the system initializes. stop or slow down the vehicle. The ESC hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak of the vehicle until the Antilock Brake System (ABS) light along with one of the following messages will be activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): movement during this time is normal and the driver TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving CONTROL, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If you see these situation dictates. The Panic Brake Assist feature will conditions, turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then automatically disengage when the brake pedal is turn it back on again to reset the system. If any of these released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. messages still appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), your vehicle should be taken in for service. For more information on the DIC messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-54.

4-6 The StabiliTrak light will Traction control can be turned on by pressing and ﬂash on the instrument releasing the traction control disable button if not panel cluster when automatically shut off for any other reason. the system is both on and When the traction control system is turned off, the activated. StabiliTrak light and the appropriate traction control off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction control when traction control is off, but will not be able to You may also feel or hear the system working; this is use the engine speed management system. See normal. “Traction Control Operation” next for more information. When the traction control system has been turned The traction control disable off, you may still hear system noises as a result of the button is located on the brake-traction control coming on. instrument panel below the climate controls. It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in off by pressing and releasing the traction control Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-21. disable button.

4-7 Traction Control Operation transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and system. Traction control limits wheel spin by this message are displayed. reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual The traction control system may activate on dry or wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary. rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts The traction control system is enabled automatically of the transmission. When this happens, you may when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise StabiliTrak light will ﬂash if it senses that any of or vibration. This is normal. the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. If you turn off traction control, only If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system the brake-traction control portion of traction control will activates, the StabiliTrak light will ﬂash and the cruise work. The engine speed management will be disabled. control will automatically disengage. When road In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly. page 3-12. StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin ® determines that a problem exists with the system. excessively while the StabiliTrak , ABS and brake If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer for service. message are displayed, you could damage the

4-8 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System Steering If your vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to Power Steering all four wheels when extra traction is needed. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever If you lose power steering assist because the engine or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for but it will take much more effort. road conditions. When using a compact spare tire on your AWD Variable Effort Steering equipped vehicle, the AWD system automatically detects If your vehicle has this steering system, the system the presence of the compact spare and the AWD is continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering disabled. To restore the AWD operation and prevent at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking, excessive wear on the clutch in your AWD system, yet a ﬁrm, solid feel at highway speeds. replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-100 for more information.

4-9 Steering Tips What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. want it to go, and slow down. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should the news happen on curves. Here is why: adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to are based on good weather and road conditions. Under the same laws of physics when driving on curves. less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes If you need to reduce speed when approaching a curve, it possible for the vehicle to change its path when do it before you enter the curve, while the front wheels you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia are straight ahead. will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the you will understand this. curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires accelerate gently into the straightaway. and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect one factor you can control. your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-6.

4-10 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and ﬁnd a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space An emergency like this requires close attention and a available. quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11 Off-Road Recovery Passing Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be road onto the shoulder while driving. dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing: • Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass. If in doubt, wait. • Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection. Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side of the lane. • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility. • Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle. • When you are being passed, ease to the right. Loss of Control If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Let us review what driving experts say about what pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the happens when the three control systems — brakes, accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of where the tires meet the road to do what the driver the pavement. Turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter has asked. turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer the roadway. and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

4-12 Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. want to slow down and adjust your driving to these Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving surfaces because stopping distance is longer and those conditions. But skids are always possible. vehicle control more limited. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much slide. You might not realize the surface is slippery until throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on of the accelerator pedal. the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, avoid only the braking skid. your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

4-13 Driving at Night • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by • Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by curves. fatigue. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Night driving tips include: But, as we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much • Drive defensively. light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. • Do not drink and drive. • Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads rearview mirror. Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction • Slow down and keep more space between you and and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. other vehicles because headlamps can only light up Always drive slower in these types of driving so much road ahead. conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or ﬂowing water. • Watch for animals. • When tired, pull off the road. • Do not wear sunglasses. • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

4-14 Hydroplaning { CAUTION: Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is work as well in a quick stop and could cause hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake Other Rainy Weather Tips pedal until the brakes work normally. Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips Flowing or rushing water creates strong include: forces. Driving through flowing water could • Allow extra following distance. cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants • Pass with caution. could drown. Do not ignore police warnings • Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. and be very cautious about trying to drive • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. through flowing water. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-49. • Turn off cruise control, if equipped.

4-15 Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a Things to check on your own include: safe place to park your vehicle and rest. • Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Other driving tips include: Windows clean — inside and outside? • Keep the vehicle well ventilated. • Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Keep interior temperature cool. • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead • Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? and to the sides. • Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments • Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to often. recommended pressure? • Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date maps? Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: • Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. • Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.

4-16 • Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut { across the center of the road. Drive at speeds CAUTION: that let you stay in your own lane. • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your If you do not shift down, the brakes could get lane (stalled car, accident). so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: { CAUTION: • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. • You might want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a to do all the work of slowing down and they supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter could get so hot that they would not work well. outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, You would then have poor braking or even and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a none going down a hill. You could crash. small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of Always have the engine running and the burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you vehicle in gear when going downhill. properly secure these items in your vehicle. Also see Tires on page 5-49.

4-17 Driving on Snow or Ice What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the can be even more trouble because it can offer the least road probably have good traction. traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. the road, you can have a very slippery situation. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be can get there. very careful. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution. StabiliTrak® improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even with StabiliTrak®, slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you might want to turn the traction control part of the StabiliTrak® System off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-6 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-21.

4-18 The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your If You Are Caught in a Blizzard vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. serious situation. You should probably stay with See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5. your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are • Allow greater following distance on any some things to do to summon help and keep yourself slippery road. and your passengers safe: • Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such you have been stopped by the snow. as around clumps of trees, behind buildings, • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make or an overpass can remain icy when the body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. to brake while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

4-19 { CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-20 Run the engine only as long as you must. This saves If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to and use the rocking method. restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost { CAUTION: all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as speed, they can explode, and you or others possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until causing an engine compartment ﬁre or other help comes. damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, shown on the speedometer. Mud, Ice, or Snow For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the see Tire Chains on page 5-71. vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22.

4-21 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading the Vehicle First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear It is very important to know how much weight your the area around the front wheels. Turn the traction vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle control part of the StabiliTrak® System off. See capacity weight and includes the weight of all StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-6. Then shift back and occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning Information label and the Certiﬁcation/Tire label. before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning { CAUTION: the wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it Do not load the vehicle any heavier than might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27. or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle.

4-22 Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-49 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed Example Label XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information and passengers that will be riding in your label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle. vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver The tire and loading information label shows the and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

4-23 4. The resulting ﬁgure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be ﬁve 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Example 1 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity this reduces the available cargo and luggage 1,000 lbs load capacity for your vehicle. A Weight for = (453 kg) See Towing a Trailer on page 4-31 for important Example 1 information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, Subtract Occupant and trailering tips. B Weight 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg) (68 kg) × 2 = Available Occupant C and Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

4-24 Example 2 Example 3

Item Description Total Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity A Weight for 1,000 lbs A Weight for 1,000 lbs Example 2 = (453 kg) Example 3 = (453 kg) Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant B Weight 150 lbs 750 lbs (340 kg) B Weight 200 lbs 1,000 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = (91 kg) × 5 = (453 kg) Available Cargo 250 lbs (113 kg) Available Cargo C Weight = C Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for speciﬁc information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions.

4-25 The combined weight of the driver, passengers, The Certification/Tire label also tells you the and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum weights for the front and rear axles, capacity weight. called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear Certification/Tire Label axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{ CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. A vehicle speciﬁc Certiﬁcation/Tire label is These could cause you to lose control attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. and crash. Also, overloading can shorten The label shows the gross weight capacity of your the life of the vehicle. vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-26 If you put things inside your vehicle — like Towing suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they Towing Your Vehicle will keep going. To avoid vehicle damage, a platform or ﬂatbed trailer should be used to transport this vehicle. Consult { CAUTION: your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle or turn, or in a crash. for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), • Put things in the cargo area of your see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Recreational Vehicle Towing • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle some of them are above the tops of behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. the seats. The two most common types of recreational vehicle • Do not leave an unsecured child towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle restraint in your vehicle. with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and • When you carry something inside the two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”). vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

4-27 With the proper preparation and equipment, many Dinghy Towing vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following in this section. Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing: • What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. • How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. • Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. • Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on towed from the front. These vehicles may also be page 4-16. towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy towed from the front. You can also tow these vehicles by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly.

4-28 For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle should be Notice: If you tow your vehicle without performing run at the beginning of each day and at each RV each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,” fuel stop for about ﬁve minutes. This will ensure proper you could damage the automatic transmission. lubrication of transmission components. Re-install Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing the fuse to start the vehicle. procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle. To tow your vehicle from the front with all four wheels Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while on the ground: towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never 1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle. towing vehicle. Once you have reached your destination: 2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the 1. Set the parking brake. ignition to LOCK/OFF. 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the underhood 3. Set the parking brake. fuse block. 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), turn the ignition 5. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral). to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 6. To prevent your battery from draining while the 4. Release the parking brake. vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive BATT1 fuse from the underhood fuse block and wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a store in a safe location. See Underhood Fuse Block compact spare tire. Towing with two different on page 5-115. tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause 7. Release the parking brake. severe damage to the transmission.

4-29 Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with two wheels on the ground. To properly tow these To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer two wheels on the ground: with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front. 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake.

4-30 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead Towing a Trailer position with a clamping device designed for towing. 5. Remove the key from the ignition. 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. { CAUTION: 7. Release the parking brake. If you do not use the correct equipment and Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. from the rear. Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.

4-31 That is the reason for this part. In it are many • Do not tow a trailer at all during the ﬁrst 500 miles time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. (805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, Many of these are important for your safety and that of axle or other parts could be damaged. your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. • Then, during the ﬁrst 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) Load-pulling components such as the engine, and do not make starts at full throttle. This transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle forced to work harder against the drag of the added wear in at the heavier loads. weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra • Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts. If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer • You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the If you do, here are some important points: transmission to LOW (L) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often • There are many different laws, including speed limit (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section. your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source Three important considerations have to do with weight: for this information can be state or provincial police. • The weight of the trailer. • Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch • The weight of the trailer tongue. dealer/retailer about sway controls. • And the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-32 Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing the button again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the off Tow/Haul every time it is started. Tow/Haul mode is to: Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the • Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). a large or heavy load. See Weight of the Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is • Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a most useful under the following driving conditions: heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load the vehicle is unloaded. through rolling terrain. • Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy in stop and go traffic. trailer or a large or heavy load. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load • Increase the charging system voltage to assist in in busy parking lots where improved low speed recharging a battery installed in a trailer. control of the vehicle is desired. Press this button located Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded on the console to or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However, enable/disable the there is no beneﬁt to the selection of Tow/Haul when Tow/Haul mode. the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

The Tow/Haul light on the instrument panel will come on to indicate that Tow/Haul mode has been selected.

4-33 Weight of the Trailer Look in the following chart to ﬁnd the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle. How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For Vehicle Maximum *GCWR example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside Trailer Weight temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull Front-Wheel 2,000 lbs 7,500 lbs a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any Drive (907 kg) (3 402 kg) special equipment that you have on your vehicle, **Front-Wheel 4,500 lbs 9,500 lbs and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. Drive (2 041 kg) (4 309 kg) See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this 2,000 lbs 7,700 lbs section for more information. All-Wheel Drive (907 kg) (3 493 kg) 4,500 lbs 9,700 lbs Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the **All-Wheel Drive driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required (2 041 kg) (4 400 kg) trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle the total allowable weight of the completely loaded must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded. **Includes optional trailer towing package (V92) Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for more information.

4-34 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22 for If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a more information about your vehicle’s maximum weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should load capacity. weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight.

4-35 Consider the following example: But let us say your speciﬁc vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your vehicle GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of now weighs: 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be the rear axle will be greater than just the weight 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the (578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but (408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

4-36 The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual Hitches weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is are some rules to follow: 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). • The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these bumper. ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer. • Will you have to make any holes in the body of Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust page 4-22. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW on page 2-37. Dirt and water can, too. limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

4-37 Safety Chains Driving with a Trailer You should always attach chains between your vehicle Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the Before setting out for the open road, you will want to tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching responsive as your vehicle is by itself. safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and Always leave just enough slack so you can turn attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric the ground. brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then Trailer Brakes apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your If you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer electrical connection at the same time. brakes. Because your vehicle has antilock brakes, During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the do not try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer system. If you do, both brake systems will not work brakes are still working. well, or at all. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer Following Distance brakes so you will be able to install, adjust and Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as maintain them properly. you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

4-38 Passing Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer You will need more passing distance up ahead when When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a good different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check deal longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrument passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also Backing Up flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind have someone guide you. you are seeing your signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer Making Turns bulbs are still working. Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering Driving on Grades could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger and making very sharp turns while trailering. load carrying vehicle. If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns additional load. Because of the added load of the trailer, than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days, soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in engine coolant temperature gage indicates overheating, advance. turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load, pull off the road and stop in a safe spot.

4-39 Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift how to do it: down, you might have to use your brakes so much that 1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into they would get hot and no longer work well. PARK (P). On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from speed to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reduce the the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels possibility of the engine and the transmission into the curb. overheating. 2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer Parking on Hills wheels. 3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. { CAUTION: 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P). You really should not park your vehicle, with a 5. Release the regular brakes. trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

4-40 When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you are 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on while you: page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission • start your engine, fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive • shift into a gear, and belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you • release the parking brake. find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good idea 2. Let up on the brake pedal. to review this information before you start your trip. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harness for towing a trailer.

4-41 Basic Trailer Wiring If the back-up lamp circuit is not functional, contact your dealer/retailer. The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector, is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be the Tow/Haul mode switch located on the center plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer console near the climate controls. This will boost the connector available through your dealer/retailer. vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul mode, you can The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer turn on the headlamps (Non-HID only) as a second way circuits: to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery. • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during • Brown: Taillamps severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on • Black: Ground page 5-23. • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red/Black: Battery Feed • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* *The fuse for this circuit is installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed service center.

4-42 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Service ...... 5-3 Overheated Engine Protection Accessories and Modifications ...... 5-3 Operating Mode ...... 5-25 California Proposition 65 Warning ...... 5-4 Cooling System ...... 5-26 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-32 Doing Your Own Service Work ...... 5-4 Windshield Washer Fluid ...... 5-33 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Brakes ...... 5-34 Vehicle ...... 5-5 Battery ...... 5-37 Fuel ...... 5-5 Jump Starting ...... 5-38 Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-43 Gasoline Specifications ...... 5-6 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-44 California Fuel ...... 5-6 Additives ...... 5-6 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-45 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...... 5-7 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 5-45 Filling the Tank ...... 5-8 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-45 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ...... 5-10 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-46 Checking Things Under the Hood ...... 5-11 License Plate Lamp ...... 5-47 Hood Release ...... 5-11 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-47 Engine Compartment Overview ...... 5-12 Engine Oil ...... 5-13 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 5-48 Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-16 Tires ...... 5-49 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-18 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-50 Automatic Transmission Fluid ...... 5-20 Tire Terminology and Definitions ...... 5-53 Engine Coolant ...... 5-20 Inflation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-56 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 5-23 Tire Pressure Monitor System ...... 5-58 Engine Overheating ...... 5-23 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation ...... 5-59

5-1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...... 5-63 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-104 When It Is Time for New Tires ...... 5-64 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-104 Buying New Tires ...... 5-65 Finish Care ...... 5-104 Different Size Tires and Wheels ...... 5-67 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-105 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 5-68 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 5-70 and Trim ...... 5-106 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-70 Tires ...... 5-106 Tire Chains ...... 5-71 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-107 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-72 Finish Damage ...... 5-107 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 5-73 Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-107 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-84 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-107 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-85 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...... 5-108 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Vehicle Identification ...... 5-109 Spare Tire ...... 5-88 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 5-109 Secondary Latch System ...... 5-93 Service Parts Identification Label ...... 5-109 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-96 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-100 Electrical System ...... 5-110 High Voltage Devices and Wiring ...... 5-110 Appearance Care ...... 5-100 Add-On Electrical Equipment ...... 5-110 Interior Cleaning ...... 5-100 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...... 5-110 Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-102 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-111 Leather ...... 5-102 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 5-111 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...... 5-111 Surfaces ...... 5-103 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-115 Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-103 Weatherstrips ...... 5-103 Capacities and Specifications ...... 5-120

5-2 Service Accessories and Modiﬁcations For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance and supported service people. and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks. aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty. GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories. Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-78.

5-3 California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. { CAUTION: Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many ﬂuids, and some You can be injured and your vehicle could be component wear by-products contain and/or emit damaged if you try to do service work on a these chemicals. vehicle without knowing enough about it. • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, California Perchlorate Materials experience, the proper replacement parts, Requirements and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. Certain types of automotive applications, such as • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium and other fasteners. English and metric batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, fasteners can be easily confused. If you may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling use the wrong fasteners, parts can later may be necessary. For additional information, see break or fall off. You could be hurt. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you should use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

5-4 Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting Fuel to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-78. Use of the recommended fuel is an important part You should keep a record with all parts receipts and of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help list the mileage and the date of any service work keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15. performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Adding Equipment to the Outside Gasoline Octane of the Vehicle Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer can affect the airﬂow around it. This can cause towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer you might notice an audible knocking noise when you before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.

5-5 Gasoline Specifications Additives At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States specification D 4814 in the United States or are now required to contain additives that help prevent CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing contain an octane-enhancing additive called the emission control system to work properly. In most methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. We recommend against the use of gasolines However, some gasolines contain only the minimum containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental for additional information. Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline California Fuel that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet prevent most deposit-related problems. California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-48. If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

5-6 Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, of the emission control system could be affected. if they comply with the speciﬁcations described earlier. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service. more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Fuels in Foreign Countries Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing If you plan on driving in another country outside the methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. to ﬁnd. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel That damage would not be covered under your not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly warranty. repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl contact a major oil company that does business in the (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline country where you will be driving. whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against

5-7 Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel ﬁre can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, ﬂames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. This is against the law To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle and release. The door will pop open. while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

5-8 { CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overﬁll the tank and wait a few seconds after you have ﬁnished To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released from painted surfaces as soon as possible. too soon, it will spring back to the right. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-104. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door.

5-9 When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it Filling a Portable Fuel Container clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp { CAUTION: on page 3-48. If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from fuel cap is not properly installed. the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and { CAUTION: others: • Dispense fuel only into approved If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not containers. remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by • Do not fill a container while it is inside a shutting off the pump or by notifying the vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, station attendant. Leave the area immediately. or on any surface other than the ground. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the nozzle. Contact should be maintained the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one until the filling is complete. for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit • Do not smoke while pumping fuel. properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator • Do not use a cellular phone while lamp to light and may damage your pumping fuel. fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-48.

5-10 Checking Things Under Hood Release the Hood To open the hood, do the following: 1. Pull the hood release handle with this symbol { CAUTION: on it. It is located under the instrument An electric fan under the hood can start up panel on the driver’s and injure you even when the engine is not side of the vehicle. running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the center of { CAUTION: the hood, and push the secondary hood release to the right. Things that burn can get on hot engine parts 3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood in the fully open position. oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on others could be burned. Be careful not to drop properly. or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood until the lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Then allow the hood to fall and latch into place under its own weight. Check to make sure the hood is closed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently push the hood down at the front and center of the hood until it is completely latched.

5-11 Engine Compartment Overview When you lift the hood, here is what you will see:

5-12 A. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of View). See Radiator K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Pressure Cap on page 5-23. Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. See Cooling System L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding on page 5-26. Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-33. on page 5-38. D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block Engine Oil on page 5-115. E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on Checking Engine Oil page 5-38. It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-32. must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. under Engine Oil on page 5-13. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” for the location of the engine oil dipstick. under Engine Oil on page 5-13. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. Transmission Fluid on page 5-20. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it under Brakes on page 5-34. again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13 When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil ﬁll cap.

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area. Speciﬁcations on page 5-120. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through. Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged.

5-14 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. • Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certiﬁed by the American Petroleum Institute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting Look for three things: GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American • GM6094M Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil oil can result in engine damage not covered by that meets GM Standard GM6094M. your warranty. • SAE 5W-30 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. 5-15 If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the When the system has calculated that oil life has been temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on. synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier Change the oil as soon as possible within the next cold starting and better protection for the engine at 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving extremely low temperatures. under the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. Engine Oil Additives However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the GM6094M are all you need for good performance system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and and engine protection. keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must Engine Oil Life System change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system When to Change Engine Oil whenever the oil is changed. Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.

5-16 How to Reset the Engine Oil Life 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. System If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle, the The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the engine oil and ﬁlter based on vehicle use. Whenever the procedure. the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate If your vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC) when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs buttons: where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. If your vehicle does not have Driver Information 2. Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE Center (DIC) buttons: REMAINING displays. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 3. Press and hold the set/reset button until 100% is The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this displayed. You will hear three chimes and the display. Press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will go off. OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. 2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes OIL LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. You will hear back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil three chimes and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. message will go off.

5-17 What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. When to Inspect the Engine Air Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleaner/Filter Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled of oil products. Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you at each engine oil change. change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling center for help.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine air cleaner/ﬁlter.

5-18 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter { CAUTION: To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter (away from Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter vehicle) to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter off can cause you or others to be burned. remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is following: not there and the engine backfires, you could 1. Loosen the screws that hold the cover on. be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. cleaner/filter off. 3. Lift off the cover. 4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and any loose debris that may be found in the air Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cleaner base. cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have 5. Inspect or replace the air filter element. the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. 6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover and reconnect the electrical connector.

5-19 Automatic Transmission Fluid The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. the radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-23. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and and have it repaired as soon as possible. DEX-COOL® coolant will: Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional • Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C). Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Lubricants on page 6-11. • Protect against rust and corrosion. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission • Help keep the proper engine temperature. fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always • Let the warning lights and gages work as they use the automatic transmission fluid listed in should. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can The transmission fluid will not reach the end of cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator the dipstick unless the transmission is at operating corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may temperature. If you need to check the transmission fluid require changing sooner, at the first maintenance level, please take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer. service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use Engine Coolant DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle. The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

5-20 What to Use Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and not need to add anything else. other parts. If coolant needs to be added more than four times a { CAUTION: year, have your dealer/retailer check the cooling system. Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle Adding only plain water to the cooling system could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other the engine coolant listed in this manual for the liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information. coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch ﬁre and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

5-21 Checking Coolant Adding Coolant If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL® The coolant recovery tank coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be cap has this symbol on it. careful not to spill it. If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23.

{ CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 and scalding liquids to blow out and burn for more information on the location of the coolant you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, recovery tank. you will almost never have to add coolant at The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure the coolant level. cap — even a little — when the engine and When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at radiator are hot. the FULL COLD line or a little higher. When the engine is warm, the level could be above the FULL COLD level. The FULL COLD line is marked on the coolant recovery tank.

5-22 Radiator Pressure Cap { CAUTION: Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for and it will burn if the engine parts are hot more information on location. enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Engine Overheating Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. There is an engine coolant temperature gage on your For information on how to add coolant to the radiator, vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant see Cooling System on page 5-26. Temperature Gage on page 3-47. Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE message displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64.

5-23 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Notice: If the engine catches ﬁre while driving with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by the { vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection CAUTION: Operating Mode on page 5-25 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Stay away from the engine if you see or hear Engine steam coming from it. Turn it off and get If you get an engine overheat warning but see or everyone away from the vehicle until it cools hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: coolant before you open the hood. • Climb a long hill on a hot day. If you keep driving when the vehicles engine • Stop after high-speed driving. is overheated, the liquids in it can catch ﬁre. You or others could be badly burned. Stop • Idle for long periods in traffic. your engine if it overheats, and get out of the • Tow a trailer. vehicle until the engine is cool. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, See Overheated Engine Protection Operating try this for a minute or so: Mode on page 5-25 for information on driving 1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. to a safe place in an emergency. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary. 3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving—D(Drive) or L (Low).

5-24 If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can Overheated Engine Protection drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you can drive Operating Mode normally. This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. vehicle right away. If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for protection mode which alternates ﬁring groups of three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of there is a signiﬁcant loss in power and engine the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated performance. The temperature gage indicates an Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section. overheat condition exists. Driving extended distances and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service should be avoided. help right away. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

5-25 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what { CAUTION: you will see: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. A. Engine Coolant Reservoir B. Radiator Pressure Cap (covered) C. Engine Cooling Fans

5-26 If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. { CAUTION: If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service. Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine Notice: Engine damage from running the engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. without coolant is not covered by the warranty. If you do, you can be burned. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could could cause an engine fire, and you could be require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs vehicle. would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.

5-27 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank { CAUTION: Notice: This vehicle has a speciﬁc coolant ﬁll procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling cause the engine to overheat and be severely system can blow out and burn you badly. They damaged. are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if pressure cap — even a little — they can come coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank. If coolant out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the cooling system, including the radiator pressure FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system, including to turn the pressure cap. the coolant recovery tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20 for more information.

5-28 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling system You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the and it will burn if the engine parts are hot proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the mixture, the engine could get too hot but you FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat would not get the overheat warning. The engine warning continues, there is one more thing you can try. could catch ﬁre and you or others could be You can add the proper mixture directly to the radiator, burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it. water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.

5-29 3. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.

1. To remove the panel that covers the radiator cap, 4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® detach fasteners and lift off panel. coolant mixture, up to the base of the ﬁller 2. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20 for cooling system, including the upper radiator hose, more information about the proper coolant mixture. is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

5-30 5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL 7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the COLD mark. upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the 6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, engine cooling fan. but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. Replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure to secure it tightly.

5-31 Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid, do the following: The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment the front of the engine cool down. compartment on the 2. Remove engine oil fill cap passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine 3. Slide engine cover rearward and lift to remove Compartment Overview 4. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. on page 5-12 for reservoir 5. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a location. clean rag. 6. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 7. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. When to Check Power Steering Fluid The fluid level should be somewhere between MAX It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid and MIN line on the dipstick in room temperature. unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or If the fluid is on or below MIN line, you should add you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system fluid close to MAX Line. could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. Always use the proper fluid. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-32 Windshield Washer Fluid Notice: • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow What to Use the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. When adding windshield washer fluid, be sure to read • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If operating Water can cause the solution to freeze and your vehicle in an area where the temperature may damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient the washer system. Also, water does not clean as protection against freezing. well as washer fluid. Adding Washer Fluid • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a expansion if freezing occurs, which could WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will damage the tank if it is completely full. be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s for more information. windshield washer system and paint. Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location.

5-33 Brakes It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when Brake Fluid the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on The brake master cylinder the brake hydraulic system. reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for { CAUTION: the location of the reservoir. If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is Light on page 3-45. leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.

5-34 What to Add Notice: When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. hydraulic system parts. For example, just a See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they area around the cap before removing it. This helps will have to be replaced. Do not let someone keep dirt from entering the reservoir. put in the wrong kind of fluid. • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted { CAUTION: surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-104. hydraulic system, the brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

5-35 Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes. built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-120. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete { CAUTION: axle sets. Brake Pedal Travel The brake wear warning sound means that See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not soon the brakes will not work well. That could return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase lead to an accident. When you hear the brake in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service wear warning sound, have your vehicle might be required. serviced. Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear. pads could result in costly brake repair.

5-36 Replacing Brake System Parts Battery The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When parts have to be of top quality and work well together if it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle for one that has the replacement number shown on was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. the original battery’s label. When you replace parts of the braking system — for example, when the brake linings wear down and you For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved service manual. To purchase a service manual, see replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16. work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance accessories contain lead and lead compounds, between the front and rear brakes can change — for chemicals known to the State of California to cause the worse. The braking performance you have come to cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after expect can change in many other ways if someone puts handling. in the wrong replacement brake parts.

5-37 Vehicle Storage Jump Starting If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to { use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your CAUTION: vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt { CAUTION: if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for tips on working around a battery Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous without getting hurt. because: • They contain acid that can burn you. Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently, • They contain gas that can explode or remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery. ignite. This will help keep the battery from running down. • They contain enough electricity to Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle, burn you. remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain or all of these things can hurt you. the charge of the battery over an extended period of time.

5-38 Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories damage to your vehicle that would not be covered on during the jump starting procedure, they could by your warranty. be damaged. The repairs would not be covered Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and will not work, and it could damage your vehicle. other accessories when jump starting your vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug battery with a negative ground system. unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will system with a negative ground, both vehicles can avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems could save the radio! with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. 4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle. can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote each other. If they are, it could cause a ground negative (−) jump starting terminal. See Engine connection you do not want. You would not be Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding information on the terminal locations. could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake ﬁrmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.

5-39 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery Fans or other moving engine parts can injure gas to explode. People have been hurt doing you badly. Keep your hands away from moving this, and some have been blinded. Use a parts once the engine is running. flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the batteries have enough water. 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose You do not need to add water to the ACDelco® or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a battery (or batteries) installed in your new shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure Before you connect the cables, here are some the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go add water to take care of that first. If you do to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal not, explosive gas could be present. if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)oryou in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place will get a short that would damage the battery with water and get medical help immediately. and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-40 6. Connect the red 9. Connect the other positive (+) cable to the end of the negative (−) positive (+) terminal cable at least 18 inches of the dead battery. (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move.

Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle The electrical connection is just as good there, and has one. the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal for the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a this purpose. remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a the engine for a while. − remote negative ( ) terminal if the vehicle has one. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Do not let the other end touch anything until the If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable service. does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.

5-41 Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may the following: occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the not be covered by your warranty. Always connect vehicle that had the dead battery. and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the each other or other metal. vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative (−) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-42 All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant Be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section. There are two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the ﬁller plug hole, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the ﬁller plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-43 Rear Drive Module If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough When to Check Lubricant lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug. how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what How to Check Lubricant kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim). If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. (A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.

5-44 Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-47. { CAUTION: For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. High Intensity Discharge (HID) You or others could be injured. Be sure to Lighting read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. { CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal.

5-45 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-13 or and Sidemarker Lamps Power Liftgate on page 2-14. 2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle has one. 3. Remove the two taillamp hex nut covers. 4. Remove the two hex nuts holding the taillamp assembly in place. 5. Pull out the taillamp assembly. 6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it. 7. Replace the old bulb with a new one. 8. Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, make sure the plastic pin on the taillamp assembly lines up A. Sidemarker Lamp and is inserted correctly into the opening of B. Taillamp the vehicle.

5-46 License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket. To replace one of these bulbs: 4. Install the new bulb. 1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license 5. Reverse steps1–3toreinstall the license plate lamps to the liftgate trim. plate lamp. Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number License Plate Lamp 194 Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps 3157 For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening.

5-47 Windshield Wiper Blade Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear lock in a vertical position, so care should be or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 used when pulling it away from the vehicle. for more information. 2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, hold the wiper Replacement blades come in different types and are arm in position and push the blade away from the removed in different ways. To replace the wiper wiper arm. blade assembly, do the following: 3. Replace the wiper blade. 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the 4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the windshield. rest position on the glass.

2. Press the button in the middle of the wiper arm connector, and pull the wiper blade away from the arm connector. 3. Install the new wiper blade, and make sure the wiper blade locks into place. For the proper size and type see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13.

5-48 Tires CAUTION: (Continued) Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where • Underinflated tires pose the same to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty danger as overloaded tires. The booklet for details. resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. { Tire pressure should be checked when CAUTION: your vehicle’s tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. Poorly maintained and improperly used • Overinflated tires are more likely tires are dangerous. to be cut, punctured, or broken by • Overloading your vehicle’s tires can a sudden impact — such as when cause overheating as a result of too you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the much flexing. You could have an recommended pressure. air-out and a serious accident. See • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22. If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or CAUTION: (Continued) if your vehicle’s tires have been damaged, replace them.

5-49 Tire Sidewall Labeling (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular Useful information about a tire is molded into its tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, sidewall. The examples below show a typical and service description. See the “Tire Size” passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire illustration later in this section for more detail. sidewall. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. (D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.

5-50 (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68. (G) Maximum Cold Inﬂation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone ﬂat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-100 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-72.

5-51 (B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria number of plies in the sidewall and under Specification): Original equipment tires designed the tread. to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. (C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal and numbers following the DOT (Department of safety guidelines. Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer Tire Size and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was The following illustration shows an example of a manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides typical passenger vehicle tire size. of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. (E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States page 5-56. version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P (F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and as the first character in the tire size means a numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards ratio, construction type, and service description. set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. The letter T as the first character in the tire (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates size means the tire is for temporary use only. the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

5-52 (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that Tire Terminology and Definitions indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean tire pressing outward on each square inch of the that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per it is wide. square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to Accessory Weight: This means the combined indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The weight of optional accessories. Some examples of letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D optional accessories are, automatic transmission, means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the power steering, power brakes, power windows, letter B means belted-bias ply construction. power seats, and air conditioning. (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height inches. to its width. (F) Service Description: These characters Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is represent the load range and speed rating of the located between the plies and the tread. Cords tire. The load index represents the load carry may be made from steel or other reinforcing capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index materials. can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z. by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

5-53 Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22. to the centerline of the tread. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22. in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward page 5-56. when mounted on a vehicle. Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. standard and optional equipment including the Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger but without passengers and cargo. vehicles. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall Load Index: An assigned number ranging from of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) capacity of a tire. motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum alphanumeric designator which can also identify air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, The maximum air pressure is molded onto the and date of production. sidewall. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22. at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

5-54 Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid weight, and production options weight. at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied the tire beads are seated. by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an tire can operate. asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. Traction: The friction between the tire and the The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, road surface. The amount of grip provided. bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into brand, and/or model name molding that is higher contact with the road. or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread passenger cars and some light duty trucks and remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires multipurpose vehicles. on page 5-64. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22.

5-55 UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Inflation - Tire Pressure Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings operate effectively. are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of • Too much flexing designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading • Too much heat the Vehicle on page 4-22. • Tire overloading Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on • Premature or irregular wear an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory • Poor handling weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. • Reduced fuel economy Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity you can get the following: weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. • Unusual wear See “Tire and Loading Information Label” • Poor handling under Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22. • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards

5-56 A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information How to Check label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire correct inflation pressures for your tires when they pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum may look properly inflated even when they are amount of air pressure needed to support your under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven For additional information regarding how much no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. the Vehicle on page 4-22. How you load your Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire Never load your vehicle with more weight than it inflation pressure matches the recommended was designed to carry. pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the When to Check inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check the compact spare tire, it should If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage. Spare Tire on page 5-100. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

5-57 Tire Pressure Monitor System Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. has not reached the level to trigger illumination of The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS to a receiver located in the vehicle. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. approximately one minute and then remain continuously (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the illuminated. This sequence will continue upon size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction pressure label, you should determine the proper exists. tire inflation pressure for those tires.) When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been system may not be able to detect or signal low tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one for a variety of reasons, including the installation of or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the the TPMS to continue to function properly. tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-59 for affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. additional information.

5-58 Federal Communications Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Commission (FCC) and Industry The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed and Science Canada to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure two conditions: readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. When a low tire pressure 2. This device must accept any interference received, condition is detected, the including interference that may cause undesired TPMS illuminates the low operation. tire pressure warning light The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies located on the instrument with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. panel cluster. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.

5-59 Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire the driver. For additional information and details pressure condition but it does not replace normal about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-54 or DIC on page 5-63 and Tires on page 5-49. Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-60 and DIC Warnings and Messages on Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could page 3-64. damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the weather when the vehicle is first started, and then vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early tire sealant available through your dealer/retailer. indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. Your vehicle, when new, may have included a factory-installed Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit. A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to This kit uses a GM approved liquid tire sealant. your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-73. equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.

5-60 TPMS Malfunction Light and Message • One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of malfunction light should go off when the TPMS the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the sensors are installed and the sensor matching system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light process is performed successfully. See your ﬂashes for about one minute and then stays on for the dealer/retailer for service. remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your warning message come on at each ignition cycle until vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that and wheels other than those recommended for your can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning come on are: properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-65. • One of the road tires has been replaced with the • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities spare tire, if your vehicle has one. The spare using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. malfunction light and DIC message should go off If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or once you re-install the road tire containing the signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for TPMS sensor. service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message • The TPMS sensor matching process was started but comes on and stays on. not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this section.

5-61 TPMS Sensor Matching Process The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below: 1. Set the parking brake. Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes engine off. will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC service. screen. The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each 4. Start with the driver side front tire. tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, 5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem. do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or on the tire’s sidewall. decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure the sensor identification code has been matched to gage, or a key. this tire and wheel position. You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel 6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat position, and five minutes overall to match all four the procedure in Step 5. tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or more than 7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the procedure in Step 5. the matching process stops and you need to start over.

5-62 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. indicate the sensor identification code has been Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64 and Wheel sensor matching process is no longer active. Replacement on page 5-70. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. 10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for correct rotation pattern shown here. New Tires on page 5-64 for more information. Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles rotation. (8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Pressure on page 5-56 and Loading the Vehicle on This will ensure that your vehicle continues to page 4-22. perform most like it did when the tires were new.

5-63 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire When It Is Time for New Tires Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-59. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions Capacities and Speciﬁcations on page 5-120. inﬂuence when you need new tires. One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to { CAUTION: check the treadwear indicators, which will Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to appear when your tires which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts have only 1/16 inch become loose after time. The wheel could (1.6 mm) or less of come off and cause an accident. When tread remaining. you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-84.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96.

5-64 You need new tires if any of the following statements Buying New Tires are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places GM has developed and matched specific tires for around the tire. your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed • You can see cord or fabric showing through the to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria tire’s rubber. Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that deep enough to show cord or fabric. you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. designed to give the same performance and vehicle • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that safety, during normal use, as the original tires. cannot be repaired well because of the size or GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over location of the damage. a dozen critical specifications that impact the The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are overall performance of your vehicle, including not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your brake system performance, ride and handling, vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this traction control, and tire pressure monitoring aging takes place, including temperatures, loading performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out tires have an all-season tread design, the before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling the tire manufacturer for more information. on page 5-50 for additional information.

5-65 GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like { CAUTION: it did when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the and handling performance of your vehicle. wheel rim ﬂanges could develop cracks See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-63 after many miles of driving. A tire and/or for information on proper tire rotation. wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. { CAUTION: If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those Mixing tires could cause you to lose that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure control while driving. If you mix tires of they are the same size, load range, speed rating, different sizes, brands, or types (radial and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may as your vehicle’s original tires. not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes, Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring brands, or types may also cause damage system could give an inaccurate low-pressure to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels. on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may It is all right to drive with your compact give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower spare temporarily, as it was developed for than the proper warning level you would get with use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor Tire on page 5-100. System on page 5-58.

5-66 Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-22, for more { CAUTION: information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle. If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may not provide an acceptable Different Size Tires and Wheels level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than You may increase the chance that you will your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect crash and suffer serious injury. Only use the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to Saturn specific wheel and tire systems rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic developed for your vehicle, and have them systems such as, anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags, properly installed by a Saturn certified traction control, and stability control, the performance technician. of these systems can be affected. See Buying New Tires on page 5-65 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-67 Uniform Tire Quality Grading While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with Quality grades can be found where applicable respect to these grades, they must also conform on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder to federal safety requirements and additional and maximum section width. For example: General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The following information relates to the system The treadwear grade is a comparative rating developed by the United States National Highway based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which under controlled conditions on a speciﬁed grades tires by treadwear, traction, and government test course. For example, a tire temperature performance. This applies only to graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are as well on the government course as a tire molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car graded 100. The relative performance of tires tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) depends upon the actual conditions of their use, system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type however, and may depart signiﬁcantly from the snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use norm due to variations in driving habits, service spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters practices, and differences in road characteristics of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some and climate. limited-production tires.

5-68 Traction – AA, A, B, C Temperature – A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat controlled conditions on speciﬁed government test when tested under controlled conditions on a surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C speciﬁed indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained may have poor traction performance. high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. { WARNING: The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. The traction grade assigned to this tire is Grades B and A represent higher levels of based on straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory test wheel tests, and does not include acceleration, than the minimum required by law. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. { WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inﬂated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinﬂation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

5-69 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to for your vehicle. wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the { CAUTION: alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and Wheel Replacement handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted a collision in which you or others could be or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or you need. odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying clearance to the body and chassis. capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-84 for more information.

5-70 Used Replacement Wheels CAUTION: (Continued)

{ CAUTION: cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is the vehicle and you or others may be injured dangerous. You cannot know how it has been in a crash. used or how far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to Use another type of traction device only if its replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original manufacturer recommends it for use on the equipment wheel. vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to the Tire Chains vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If you do ﬁnd traction devices that will ﬁt, install them on { CAUTION: the front tires.

Do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can CAUTION: (Continued)

5-71 If a Tire Goes Flat If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-84. It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are This information shows you how to use your vehicle’s driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. tire changing equipment and how to change a flat See Tires on page 5-49. If air goes out of a tire, It tire safely. is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: { CAUTION: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. maintenance or repairs is dangerous without Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake the appropriate safety equipment and training. to a stop well out of the traffic lane. The jack provided with your vehicle is designed A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for skid and may require the same correction you would use anything else, you or others could be badly in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by Use the jack provided with your vehicle only steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently for changing a flat tire. brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

5-72 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit If your vehicle has a factory installed tire sealant and Your vehicle is equipped with a tire sealant and compressor kit, there is no spare tire, no tire changing compressor kit that is capable of temporarily sealing equipment and no place to store a tire. a puncture up to a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage of the tire. The kit inflates with liquid sealant and air. by driving slowly to a level place and stopping. The tire sealant and compressor kit can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. After the tire is inflated 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard to the recommended pressure, see Inflation - Tire Warning Flashers on page 3-6. Pressure on page 5-56, the vehicle must be driven 2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and for five miles (8 km) to distribute the sealant in the put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into tire and seal the puncture. See “Using the Tire Park on page 2-35. Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire” later in this section. 3. Turn off the engine. 4. Inspect the flat tire. If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

If the tire has a puncture less than a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-73.

5-73 Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and After temporarily sealing the tire, it is recommended to compressor kit instructions. The kit includes: take your vehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer as soon as possible. If the sealant is removed within 100 miles (161 km) of driving, it is easier to clean from the tire and you are less likely to require a replacement tire. Accessing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit To access the tire sealant and compressor kit: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-13 for more information 2. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate.

A. Selector Switch E. Air Compressor B. On/Off Button Accessory Plug C. Air Pressure Gage F. Sealant/Air D. Tire Sealant Hose (Clear) Canister G. Air Only Hose

5-74 Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the instructional label adhered to the sealant canister. The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a tire that has become unseated from the wheel. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After usage, the tire sealant canister and sealant/air hose assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer. See “Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister” later in this section. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant 3. The tire sealant and compressor kit is located on canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before the passenger side of the storage compartment. its expiration date. Replacement canisters are available 4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and the storage compartment by grabbing the handle Installation of Sealant Canister” later in this section. of the bag and pull up.

5-75 Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor 1. Do a safety check. See If a Tire Goes Flat on Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inﬂate a page 5-72. Punctured Tire 2. Inspect the punctured tire. The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage. up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a tire that has become unseated from the wheel. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 3. Place the tire sealant and compressor kit on the ground and unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from the side of the compressor.

A. Selector Switch E. Air Compressor B. On/Off Button Accessory Plug C. Air Pressure Gage F. Sealant/Air D. Tire Sealant Hose (Clear) Canister G. Air Only Hose

5-76 { CAUTION:

Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture, and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed 35 psi (248 kPa).

7. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine on page 2-27. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.

The tire valve stem must be positioned between the 3 and 9 o’clock positions. { CAUTION: 4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise. Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture, 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve and you or others could be injured. Be sure to stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight. read the inflator instructions, and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not 6. Unwrap and plug the air compressor accessory plug (E) into an accessory power outlet in the exceed 36 psi (248 kPa). vehicle. See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-21. 8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to the sealant and air position.

5-77 9. Push the On/Off button (B). 11. Turn the compressor off by pushing the On/Off The tire sealant and compressor kit will inject switch (B). sealant and air into the tire. Sealant may leak from Steps 12 through 20 must be done immediately the puncture until the vehicle is driven and the after Step 11. hole has sealed. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak The pressure gage (C) will initially show a high air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant is distributed in the tire. into the tire. Once the sealant is completely Be careful while handling the tire sealant and dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop compressor kit as they could be hot after usage. and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only. 12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug (E) from 10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. pressure using the air pressure gage (E) on the top of the unit. The recommended inflation pressure 13. Disconnect the sealant/air hose (F) from the tire can be found on the Tire and Loading Information valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and label. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. replace the tire valve stem cap. The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the 14. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the air compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get compressor channel to stow it in its original location. an accurate reading. The compressor may be turned 15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug (E) on and off until the correct pressure is reached. back into place. Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after 20 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air compressor plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 for more information.

5-78 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation { CAUTION: pressure, remove the maximum speed label Storing the tire sealant and compressor from the sealant kit or other equipment in the passenger canister (B). compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location.

17. Place it in a highly visible location such as the 18. Return the equipment to its original storage location inside of the upper left corner of the windshield in your vehicle. or to the face of the radio/clock. 19. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to The maximum speed label reminds you to drive distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.

5-79 20. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure, Using the Air Compressor without refer to Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire to Inflate an Underinflated Tire (Not Punctured)” (Not Punctured) later in this section. To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi and not sealant: (68 kPa), below the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot seal the tire. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 for more information. If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to the recommended inflation pressure. 21. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire and vehicle. 22. Dispose of the sealant canister (D) and sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in accordance with your local state codes and practices. 23. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire Your tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory sealant and compressor kit, take your vehicle adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of to an authorized dealer/retailer to have the tire its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses, inspected and repaired or replaced. balls, etc.

5-80 4. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the valve stem by turning clockwise. 5. Remove the air compressor accessory plug (E) from the unit. 6. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (E) into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-21 for more information. Do not slam the door or close the window on the compressor accessory plug cord.

{ CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with A. Selector Switch E. Air Compressor the climate control system off can cause B. On/Off Button Accessory Plug deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine C. Air Pressure Gage F. Sealant/Air Exhaust on page 2-37. D. Tire Sealant Hose (Clear) Canister G. Air Only Hose 7. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine on 1. Do a safety check. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 2-27. The vehicle must be running while page 5-72. using the air compressor. 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) from the bottom of the air compressor. 3. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it counterclockwise.

5-81 10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the air pressure gage (E) on the { CAUTION: top of the unit. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture, The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the and you or others could be injured. Be sure to compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get read the inflator instructions, and inflate the an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may tire to its recommended pressure. Do not be turned on and off until the correct pressure is exceed 35 psi (248 kPa). reached. 11. Turn off the air compressor by pushing the On/Off button (B). 8. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the air only position. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as they could be hot after usage. The tire sealant and compressor kit will inflate the tire with air only. 12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug and wrap it back into place. 9. Push the On/Off button (B).

5-82 Removal and Installation of the Sealant { CAUTION: Canister To remove the sealant canister, do the following: Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or 1. Unwrap the sealant/air hose from the compressor. other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden 2. Push the canister release button. stop or collision, loose equipment could strike 3. Pull up and remove the canister. someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor 4. Replace with a new canister. See your kit in its original location. dealer/retailer for the new canister. 5. Push the new canister into place. 13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) from the tire valve stem by turning it counterclockwise. 14. Wrap the air only hose (G) around the side of the air compressor channel to stow it back in its original location. 15. Return the equipment to its original storage location of your vehicle.

5-83 Changing a Flat Tire CAUTION: (Continued) If a tire goes ﬂat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning ﬂashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers To be even more certain the vehicle will not on page 3-6 for more information. move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire, on the { CAUTION: other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle When your vehicle has a ﬂat tire, use the following can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you example as a guide to assist you in the placement of or other people. You and they could be badly wheel blocks. injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake ﬁrmly. 2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. CAUTION: (Continued)

The following information tells you how to use the jack and change a tire.

5-84 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the holding bracket. 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottom facing The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located toward you. in the storage compartment on the driver side, at the rear of the vehicle. 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom ﬁrst. 1. Open the jack storage compartment by squeezing down on the latch tab and pulling the cover off.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). A. Tool Bag B. Wing Bolt C. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning it counterclockwise 5-85 Removing the Spare Tire 1. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate. The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, in 2. Move the carpet cutout that is located through the front of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on hole of the storage compartment. page 5-100 for more information about the compact spare. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft. 4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.

A. Rear Convenience D. Hoist Shaft Center E. Compact Spare Tire B. Lug wrench F. Retainer C. Storage G. Hoist Shaft Compartment Assembly 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel Cap Hole opening to remove the spare tire from the cable.

5-86 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back Do the following to check the cable: up after removing the spare tire. 1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the visible. vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary Latch System on Tools on page 5-96. page 5-93. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-88. the lug wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable. 3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 under “Removing the Spare Tire” listed previously. 5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, see Secondary Latch System on page 5-93.

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch could be engaged.

5-87 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-84 for more information. 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the lug wrench. They will not come off. Then, using the ﬂat end of the lug wrench, pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off. Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Do not try to remove the cover with your bare hands. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the ﬂat tire repaired or replaced. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not remove wheel nut caps using the lug wrench. them — using the lug wrench. For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key between the lock nut and lug wrench. Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and an impact wrench is used to remove the wheel nuts, the lock nut or wheel lock key could be damaged. Do not use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts if your vehicle has wheel locks.

5-88 { CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 4. To identify the appropriate jacking location, ﬁnd the positioned can damage the vehicle and even V–shaped locating notches in the molding. make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to ﬁt the Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle without positioning it correctly, your vehicle could jack lift head into the proper location before be damaged. When raising your vehicle on a jack, raising the vehicle. avoid contact with the rear axle control arms. 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare 6. Attach the lug wrench to the jack, and turn tire near you. the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head 3 inches (7.6 cm).

5-89 7. Place the jack under the vehicle as identified in 9. Remove the spare tire heat shield by pulling the Step 3. Raise the vehicle by turning the lug wrench rubber latch. Store the spare tire heat shield. See clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96 off the ground so that there is enough room for the for more information. spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

5-90 10. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, { CAUTION: mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get 11. Place the spare tire on the wheel mounting surface. all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat 12. Put the nuts on by hand by turning the clockwise Tire on page 5-84. until the wheel is held against the mounting surface. Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel. 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. { CAUTION: Lower the jack completely.

Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts. Because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.

5-91 14. Tighten the wheel nuts ﬁrmly in a crisscross { CAUTION: sequence, as shown.

Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to a crash. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s on page 5-120 for wheel nut torque compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover specification. on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be damaged. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-120 for the wheel nut torque specification.

5-92 Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is { CAUTION: designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire Someone standing too close during the must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down. See procedure could be injured by the jack. Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96 for If the spare tire does not slide off the jack instructions on storing the spare tire correctly. completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the under spare. { CAUTION: 1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Before beginning this procedure read all the Step 3. instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next.

5-93 6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held ﬁrmly in place. This lets you know that the secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown

2. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns. 7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear the spare tire slides off the jack. bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.

5-94 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening when the spare tire has been completely lowered. 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging. Have the hoist shaft assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.

8. Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare tire while ﬁrmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

5-95 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION:

Storing the Spare Tire Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, { CAUTION: loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the To store the spare tire: spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing upwards, its secondary latch will not work 1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield on the when your vehicle was being driven, the tire compact spare tire. might contact a person or another vehicle, 3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the causing injury and, of course, damage to itself wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire. as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare Make sure the retainer is fully seated across tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down. the underside of the wheel. 4. When the compact spare tire is almost in the stored position, turn the tire so the valve is toward the rear of the vehicle. This position helps when checking the air pressure in the compact spare tire.

5-96 5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the Storing the Flat Tire vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrench until you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the Notice: Storing the full-size flat tire in the compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight. underbody hoist system can expose it to heat The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. from the exhaust system. This can damage the tire and underbody hoist system. Do not store the full-size flat tire in the underbody hoist system. 1. Remove the cable package from the jack storage area. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. 3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the lug wrench to tighten the cable.

5-97 6. Hook the other end of the cable onto the outer portion of the liftgate hinge (B).

7. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure. 8. The metal tube should be centered at the striker.

4. Hook one end of the cable onto the outside portion 9. Push the tube toward of the liftgate hinge opposite (B). the front of the vehicle. 5. Pull the cable (A) through the center of the wheel (D), then the door striker (E), and the spare tire heat shield (C).

10. Close the liftgate and latch it properly.

5-98 Storing the Tools Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 1. Attach the tool bag to the jack. 2. Make sure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you. 3. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place it down on the holding bracket. 4. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning it clockwise. 5. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the bottom of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the cover in place, insuring that the upper front and rear tabs are in the opening and push the cover closed. The center latch should be fully engaged. This secures the cover in place. A. Tool Bag Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When you B. Wing Bolt replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall C. Jack the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over the wheel nuts, using the lug wrench.

5-99 Compact Spare Tire The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system will be automatically disabled when you use the compact spare. To restore Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated the AWD and prevent excessive wear on the clutch when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. in your AWD, replace the compact spare tire with Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be a full-size tire as soon as possible. 60 psi (420 kPa). Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare. After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as Using them can damage your vehicle and can soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at on your compact spare. speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your Appearance Care convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire Interior Cleaning will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again. Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is Notice: When the compact spare is installed, cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt do not take your vehicle through an automatic can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle. your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the to set rapidly. spare tire and its wheel together.

5-100 Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can that transfer color to your home furnishings may also also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove transfer color to your vehicle’s interior. odors from your vehicle’s upholstery. When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners Do not clean your vehicle using: speciﬁcally designed for the surfaces being cleaned. • A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on from any interior surface. surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray • A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, interior surfaces. apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. • Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch your interior and does not improve the effectiveness the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window of soil removal. defogger. When cleaning the glass on your • Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. degreasers can leave residue that streaks and Many cleaners contain solvents that may become attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s • Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery. interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and windows. • Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that can damage your vehicle’s interior. Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

5-101 Fabric/Carpet If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used locally cleaned area gives any impression that a on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, ring formation may result, clean the entire surface. always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the possible using one of the following techniques: fabric or carpet. • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel Leather until no more can be removed. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to then vacuum. remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be To clean: used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot club soda. lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. and protect leather may permanently change the 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub appearance and feel of your leather and are not toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. products, or those containing organic solvents to 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the cleaning cloth remains clean. appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather. 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water.

5-102 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Care of Safety Belts Plastic Surfaces Keep belts clean and dry. A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, { a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can CAUTION: be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and it may severely weaken them. In a crash, protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change they might not be able to provide adequate the appearance and feel of your interior and are not protection. Clean safety belts only with mild recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean soap and lukewarm water. your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Weatherstrips Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last annoying reﬂections in the windshield and even make longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply it difficult to see through the windshield under certain silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, conditions. damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-103 Washing Your Vehicle High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. it clean by washing it often. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses states that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on your vehicle or damage may occur Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a and it would not be covered by the warranty. car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car page 5-104. washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your Finish Care vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’ hand may be necessary to remove residue from the directions regarding correct product usage, necessary paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any from your dealer/retailer. vehicle care product. If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton paint finish. towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

5-104 Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended paint finish on your vehicle. for all bright metal parts. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted Blades surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked glass cleaner. safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. whenever possible. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Wipers can be damaged by: Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep • Extreme dusty conditions their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually Sand and salt needed. However, you may use chrome polish on • chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. • Heat and sun • Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-105 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. and Trim Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Your vehicle may have either aluminum or Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels chrome-plated wheels. could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild on chrome wheels only. soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but be applied. avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an driving on roads that have been sprayed with automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum chlorides are used on roads for conditions such or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not as ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle with soap and water after exposure. equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, carbide tire cleaning brushes. abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The Tires repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. chrome-plated wheels. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted products on your vehicle may damage the paint surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, ﬁnish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

5-106 Sheet Metal Damage Underbody Maintenance If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop control can collect on the underbody. If these are not applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the replaced to restore corrosion protection. underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas Finish Damage of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal can do this for you. will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense. Chemical Paint Spotting Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a areas of finish damage can be corrected in your chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop. attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

5-107 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage Removes swirl marks, fine Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light surface contamination. Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior Wax-Treated polishing cloth. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and protects finish. Tar and Road Oil Removes tar, road oil, Remover and asphalt. Cleans, shines, and Foaming Tire Shine Low protects tires. No wiping Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Gloss necessary. Polish stainless steel. Medium foaming White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black shampoo. Cleans Cleaner marks from whitewalls. Wash Wax Concentrate and lightly waxes. Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. Biodegradable and Removes dirt, grime, phosphate free. Glass Cleaner smoke, and fingerprints. Removes spots and stains Removes dirt and grime Spot Lifter from carpets, vinyl, and Chrome and Wire Wheel cloth upholstery. Cleaner from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers. Odorless spray odor Removes dust, Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics, fingerprints, and surface vinyl, leather, and carpet. Finish Enhancer contaminants. Spray on wipe off.

5-108 Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-120 for your vehicle’s engine code. Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has the following information: This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on • Model designation the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on • Paint information the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the • Production options and special equipment certificates of title and registration. Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

5-109 Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your High Voltage Devices and Wiring vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered { by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment CAUTION: can keep other components from working as they should. Exposure to high voltage can cause shock, Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even burns, and even death. The high voltage if your vehicle is not operating. systems in your vehicle can only be serviced Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to by technicians with special training. add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing High voltage devices are identified by labels. Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-78. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify these devices. High voltage cable or wiring has Windshield Wiper Fuses orange covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring. The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

5-110 Power Windows and Other Power Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you Options replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. protecting the circuit until the problem is ﬁxed or Replace the fuse as soon as you can. goes away. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses and Circuit Breakers The instrument panel fuse block is located under the The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle. short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block. and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of ﬁres caused by electrical problems.

5-111 Fuses Usage FRT/WSW Front Windshield Wiper SPARE Spare HTD/SEAT Front Heated Seats

STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel Illumination ILLUM MSM Memory Seat Module PWR/MIRRORS Power Mirrors DR/LCK Door Locks AIRBAG Airbag System LT/TRN/SIG Driver Side Turn Signal REAR WIPER Rear Window Wiper

Fuse Side 5-112 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage DRL 2** Not Used PWR MOD PassKey Module, Body Control Module INFOTAINMENT Infotainment System BCK/UP/STOP Back-up Lamps, Stoplamps BCM Body Control Module HVAC Climate Control System SPARE Spare DISPLAY Display CTSY Dome Lamps RT/TRN/SIG Passenger Side Turn Signal INADV/ Interior Lamps DRL* Daytime Running Lamps PWR/LED RADIO Radio ONSTR/VENT Emissions PDM Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release AMP Audio Ampliﬁer

5-113 Relays Usage LT/PWR/SEAT Driver Side Power Seat Relay RT/PWR/SEAT Passenger Side Power Seat Relay PWR/WNDW Power Windows Relay PWR/COLUMN Power Steering Column Relay L/GATE Liftgate Relay LCK Power Lock Relay REAR/WSW Rear Window Washer Relay

Relay Side 5-114 UNLCK Power Unlock Relay Underhood Fuse Block DRL2 Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock Relay DRL Daytime Running Lamps Relay SPARE Spare FRT/WSW Front Windshield Washer Relay

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

5-115 To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index ﬁnger and pull straight out.

5-116 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch LT PRK Left Parking Lamp Antilock Braking System (ABS) LT TRLR Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn ABS MTR Motor STOP/TRN Signal AFS Adaptive Forward Lighting System ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils AIRBAG Airbag System PCM IGN Powertrain Control Module Ignition AUX POWER Auxiliary Power PWR OUTLET Power Outlet AWD All-Wheel-Drive System REAR CAMERA Rear Camera ECM Engine Control Module RR APO Rear Accessory Power Outlet ECM 1 Engine Control Module 1 RR HVAC Rear Climate Control System EMISSION 1 Antilock Brakes System 2 RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp EMISSION 2 Emission 2 RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils RT PRK Right Parking Lamp FOG LAMP Fog Lamps RT TRLR Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump STOP/TRN Signal HORN Horn RVC SNSR Regulated Voltage Control Sensor HTD MIR Heated Outside Rearview Mirror SPARE Spare LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp SPARE Spare LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp SPARE Spare

5-117 Fuses Usage J-Case Fuses Usage SPARE Spare ABS MTR ABS Motor SPARE Spare BATT 1 Battery 1 SPARE Spare BATT 2 Battery 2 TCM Transmission Control Module BATT 3 Battery 3 TRANS Transmission FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 TRLR BRK Trailer Brake HTD WASH Heated Windshield Washer System

TRLR PRK Trailer Parking Lamps HVAC BLWR Climate Control System Blower LAMP PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate TRLR PWR Trailer Power RR DEFOG Rear Defogger WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/Washer S/ROOF/ SUNSHADE Sunroof, Sunshade STRTR Starter

5-118 Relays Usage Relays Usage A/C CMPRSR IGN Ignition Main CLTCH Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch LT TRLR Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn CRNK Switched Power STOP/TRN Signal Lamp FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 PRK LAMP Park Lamp FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 PWR/TRN Powertrain FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger FOG LAMP Fog Lamps RT TRLR Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Signal Lamp FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump SPARE Spare HI BEAM High-Beam Headlamps TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps High Intensity Discharge (HID) HID/LO BEAM Low-Beam Headlamps WPR Windshield Wiper HORN Horn WPR HI Windshield Wiper High Speed

5-119 Capacities and Speciﬁcations The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

Capacities Application English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 12.2 qt 11.6 L Engine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 L Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L Transmission Fluid 9.5 qt 9.0 L Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Speciﬁcations Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.043 in (1.10 mm)

5-120 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-2 Owner Checks and Services ...... 6-8 Introduction ...... 6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-8 Maintenance Requirements ...... 6-2 At Least Once a Month ...... 6-9 Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-9 Using the Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 6-11 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-4 Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 6-13 Additional Required Services ...... 6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ...... 6-14 Maintenance Footnotes ...... 6-7 Maintenance Record ...... 6-15

6-1 Maintenance Schedule Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working Introduction condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You might drive very short distances only a Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and few times a week. Or you might drive long distances change as recommended. all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might Maintenance Requirements drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need replacement parts, and recommended fluids and more frequent checks and replacements. So please read lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary the following and note how you drive. If you have any to keep your vehicle in good working condition. questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled see your dealer/retailer. maintenance might not be covered by warranty. This schedule is for vehicles that: Your Vehicle and the Environment • carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps on page 4-22. the environment. All recommended maintenance is • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect driving limits. the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, on page 5-5. and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service should be performed when indicated. See Additional needs, you will know that trained and supported service Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance technicians will perform the work using genuine parts. Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. If you want to purchase service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16. { CAUTION: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what should be checked, when to check it, and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle The proper replacement parts, ﬂuids, and lubricants to can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants you can be seriously injured. Do your own on page 6-11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on maintenance work only if you have the page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure required know-how and the proper tools and these are used. All parts should be replaced and all equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, necessary repairs done before you or anyone else see your dealer/retailer to have a qualiﬁed drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine technician do the work. See Doing Your parts from your dealer/retailer. Own Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless you are technically qualiﬁed and have the necessary equipment, you should have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.

6-3 Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears, certain services, checks, and inspections When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message are required. Required services are described in the comes on, it means that service is required for your following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible Generally, it is recommended that your ﬁrst service be within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II, that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II engine oil life system might not indicate that vehicle thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II service is necessary for over a year. However, may be required more often. the engine oil and ﬁlter must be changed at least Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the once a year and at this time the system must be reset. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased who will perform this work using genuine parts and or Maintenance II was performed. reset the system. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, service performed was Maintenance I. Always use you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles Maintenance II whenever the message comes on (5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to 10 months or more since the last service or if the reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. message has not come on at all for one year. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

6-4 Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control •• Service. Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). •• Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air • Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. See footnote (l). Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-63 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month •• on page 6-9. Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). •• Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as •• needed. Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in •• this section. Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. • Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

6-5 Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • ••••• Inspect exhaust system for loose or • ••••• damaged components. Replace engine air cleaner filter. See ••• Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. Change automatic transmission fluid ••• (severe service). See footnote (h). Change automatic transmission fluid • (normal service). Replace spark plugs and inspect spark • plug wires. An Emission Control Service. Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first). • An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. • See footnote (k).

6-6 Maintenance Footnotes (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other (a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. on page 1-80. (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as stick or squeak. needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the (g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is problem. Have the system inspected and repaired recommended at least once a year. and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. (d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or (h) Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement regularly reaches 90¡F (32¡C) or higher. on page 5-48 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper − In hilly or mountainous terrain. Blades on page 5-105 for more information. − When doing frequent trailer towing. − Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery service.

6-7 (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service At Each Fuel Fill can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20 It is important to perform these underhood checks at for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, each fuel fill. condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. Engine Oil Level Check (j) Check system for interference or binding and for Notice: It is important to check the engine oil damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to Replace any components that have high effort or keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle cruise control cables. warranty. (k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary. necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. (l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL® Owner Checks and Services coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-20. These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check dependability, and emission control performance. Your Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services. washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. necessary. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

6-8 At Least Once a Month At Least Once a Year Tire Inflation Check Starter Switch Check Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on { CAUTION: page 5-56. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-84. When you are doing this inspection, the Tire Wear Inspection vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on around the vehicle. page 5-63. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-34. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

6-9 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Ignition Transmission Lock Check Control System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. • The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only { CAUTION: when the shift lever is in PARK (P). • The ignition key should come out only in When you are doing this inspection, the LOCK/OFF. vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. moves, you or others could be injured. Parking Brake and Automatic 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room Transmission Park (P) Mechanism around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level Check surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-34. { CAUTION: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. When you are doing this check, your vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, could begin to move. You or others could be but do not start the engine. Without applying the injured and property could be damaged. Make regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever sure there is room in front of your vehicle in moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the for service. regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

6-10 Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing Recommended Fluids and downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. Lubricants • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part the engine running and the transmission in number, or specification can be obtained from your NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from dealer/retailer. the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Usage Fluid/Lubricant • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: Engine oil which meets GM With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then Standard GM6094M and displays release the parking brake followed by the regular the American Petroleum Institute brake. Engine Oil Certified for Gasoline Engines Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. starburst symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Underbody Flushing Service engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable At least every spring, use plain water to flush any water and use only DEX-COOL® corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris page 5-20. can collect. Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

6-11 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Windshield Optikleen Washer Solvent. Hood Latch Washer Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant System (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2, in Canada 89021186). and Release Category LB or GC-LB. Pawl Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid. Hood and Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube Door Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube and Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Folding Seat in Canada 10953474). Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant Carrier (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, Assembly — SAE 75W-90 Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or Differential Synthetic Axle Lubricant Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (Rear Drive (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, Module) and in Canada 89021678) meeting in Canada 992887). Transfer Case (Power GM Speciﬁcation 9986115. Transfer Unit)

6-12 Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 — Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Driver – 24.6 inches (62.5 cm) 15254805 — Passenger – 20.8 inches (53.0 cm) 15254804 — Rear – 11.6 inches (30.0 cm) 15276259 —

6-13 Engine Drive Belt Routing 3.6L V6 Engine

6-14 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II

6-15 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II

6-16 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II

6-17 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II

6-18 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance and Information ...... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 7-15 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the Online Owner Center ...... 7-5 United States Government ...... 7-15 Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Telephone (TTY) Users ...... 7-6 Canadian Government ...... 7-15 Customer Assistance Offices ...... 7-6 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ...... 7-16 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 7-7 Service Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-16 Roadside Assistance Program ...... 7-7 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ...... 7-18 Scheduling Service Appointments ...... 7-10 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-18 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-10 OnStar® ...... 7-19 Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-12 Navigation System ...... 7-19 Radio Frequency Identiﬁcation (RFID) ...... 7-19

7-1 Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center Information by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will Customer Satisfaction Procedure handle your call and assist in providing product and warranty information, the nearest retailer location, Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed any concerns you may have. to providing our customers with unparalleled service, before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the following information available to give the Customer sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle Assistance Representative: are resolved by the retailer’s sales or service • Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN). This 17-digit departments. If, for any reason, your ownership number can be found on the vehicle registration or experience falls below your expectations, we suggest title, on the upper driver side corner of the instrument you take the following action: panel, or on your roadside assistance key card. STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance • The name of your selling and servicing retail facility. Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns. • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level. • Your daytime and evening phone numbers. When contacting Saturn, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One ﬁrst.

7-2 STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the retailers are committed to making sure you are toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However, following address: if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following BBB Auto Line Program the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. and its retailers offer the additional assistance of a 4200 Wilson Boulevard neutral party through our voluntary participation Suite 800 in a mediation/arbitration program called Better Business Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Bureau (BBB) Auto Line. Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program www.dr.bbb.org/goauto administered by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all 50 states and the Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation Limited Warranty. This program is available at no cost reserves the right to change eligibility limitations to you, our customer. and/or discontinue its participation in this program. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case is generally heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you can reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

7-3 STEP THREE (Canadian Owners): For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), General Motors Participation in the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call Mediation/Arbitration Program the Saturn Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you may write to: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Mediation/Arbitration Program Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Communication Centre has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes General Motors of Canada Limited involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The Mail Code: CA1-163-005 program provides for the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 informal hearing before the arbiter. The program Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 is designed so that the entire dispute settlement Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle process, from the time you file your complaint to the Identification Number (VIN). final decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

7-4 Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only) My GM Canada is a password-protected section of (United States only) gmcanada.com where you can save information on This is a resource for your Saturn ownership needs. GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy Specific vehicle information can be found in one place. tools and forms with greater ease. The Online Owner Center allows you to: Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to: • Get e-mail service reminders. − My Showroom: Find and save information on • Access information about your specific vehicle, vehicles and current offers in your area. including tips and videos and an electronic − My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as version of this owner manual. address and phone number for each of your • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and preferred GM Dealers or Retailers. maintenance schedule. − My Driveway: Receive service reminders and • Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide. helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle. • Receive special promotions and privileges only − My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to available to members. E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease. Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within information and to register your vehicle. www.gmcanada.com.

7-5 Customer Assistance for Text In Canada, write to: Saturn Customer Communication Centre Telephone (TTY) Users General Motors of Canada Ltd. To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn CA1-163-005 has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices 1908 Colonel Sam Drive for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Assistance Center. www.gmcanada.com 1-800-263-1999 Any hearing or speech-impaired customer who has 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 (TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830. Customer Assistance Offices Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to: Saturn Customer Assistance Center 100 Saturn Parkway Mail Code 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500 1-800-553-6000 1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

7-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn Program Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000. In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada may call 1-800-263-3830. Roadside Assistance Program For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438). This program, available to qualiﬁed applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. require for your vehicle such as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc. As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside The offer is available for a limited period of time from Assistance Program. the date of vehicle purchase/lease.

7-7 Who is Covered? • Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow. is not eligible for coverage. • Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good Services Provided condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer is responsible The following services are provided in the U.S. and for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), by a warrantable failure. whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up to a maximum of $100. • Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no charge if the vehicle does not start. • Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station • Trip Routing Service (Canada Only): Upon (approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service to request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed, provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons, computer personalized maps, highlighting your propane and other alternative fuels are not choice of either the most direct route or the most provided through this service. scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North America, along with helpful travel information Lock-Out Service: Lock-out service is covered at • pertaining to your trip. no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if Please allow three weeks before your planned you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure departure date. Trip routing requests are limited to security, the driver must present personal six per calendar year. identification before lock-out service is provided. In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.

7-8 • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered. (Canada Only): In the event of a warranty related However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty vehicle disablement, while en route and over repairs are the responsibility of the driver. 250 kilometres from the original point of departure, Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve you might qualify for trip interruption expense the right to limit services or reimbursement to an assistance. This assistance covers reasonable owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500 become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence. (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night), and Calling for Assistance (C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting provide the following to the Roadside Assistance for your vehicle to be repaired. Representatives: Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a • Your name, home address, and home telephone copy of the repair order are required. number Once authorization has been given, your advisor will • Telephone number of your location help you make any necessary arrangements and Location of the vehicle explain how to claim for trip interruption expense • assistance. • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the • Alternative Service (Canada Only): There could be vehicle times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle secure local emergency road service, and you will be Description of the problem reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the • original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

7-9 Towing and Road Service Exclusions If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance day as possible to allow for the same day repair. coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial Courtesy Transportation or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of To enhance your ownership experience, we and our snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty the right to make any changes or discontinue the in both the U.S. and Canada. Roadside Assistance program at any time without Several courtesy transportation options are available to notification. assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required. Scheduling Service Appointments Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with By scheduling a service appointment and advising your each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage service consultant of your transportation needs, your information. dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.

7-10 Transportation Options Courtesy Rental Vehicle Warranty service can generally be completed while you Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle to minimize your inconvenience by providing several that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited your retailer can offer you one of the following: and must be supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement Shuttle Service and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering provider requirements. Requirements vary and may Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you with include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, shuttle service to get you to your destination with credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area. beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a Public Transportation or Fuel courtesy rental. Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and Additional Program Information public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be shuttle service, the expense must be supported by available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer original receipts and can only be up to the maximum for specific information about availability. All Courtesy amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition, Transportation arrangements will be administered for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation by appropriate retailer personnel. through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time original receipts. See your retailer for information and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of to the terms and conditions described herein at its fuel or other transportation costs. sole discretion. 7-11 Collision Damage Repair an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety performance, however, If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and technician using the proper equipment and quality any related failures are not covered by that warranty. replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety made by companies other than GM and may not performance can be compromised in subsequent have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these collisions. parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature Collision Parts durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited same materials and construction methods as the parts Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM are not covered by that warranty. Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are Repair Facility preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help We recommend that you choose a collision repair maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. facility that meets your needs before you ever need Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be and comparable equipment.

7-12 Insuring Your Vehicle If a Crash Occurs Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There • Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are are signiﬁcant differences in the quality of coverage uninjured, make sure that no one else in your afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs • If there has been an injury, call emergency services by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all companies will not specify aftermarket collision matters have been taken care of. Move your parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM are instructed to move it by a police officer. original equipment collision parts. If such insurance • Give only the necessary and requested information coverage is not available from your current insurance to police and other parties involved in the crash. carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. require you to have insurance that assures repairs with This will help guard against post-crash legal action. Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) • If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on end of your lease for poor quality repairs. page 7-7 for more information. • If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name, the service’s name, and the phone number. • Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle.

7-13 • Gather the important information you will need from Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair the other driver. Things like name, address, phone Process number, driver’s license number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Identiﬁcation Number (VIN), insurance company GM recommends that you take an active role in its and policy number, and a general description of the repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of damage to the other vehicle. choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. • If possible, call your insurance company from the Specify to the facility that any required replacement scene of the crash. They will walk you through collision parts be original equipment parts, either new the information they will need. If they ask for Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. a police report, phone or go to the police Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your department headquarters the next day and you can GM vehicle warranty. get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your laws, a report may not be necessary. This is insurance company may initially value the repair using especially true if there are no injuries and both aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair vehicles are drivable. professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. private collision repair facility to ﬁx the damage, make sure you are comfortable with them. If another party’s insurance company is paying for the Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair their work for a long time. valuation based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and that company. In such cases, you can have control of make sure you understand what work will be the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within performed on your vehicle. If you have a question, reasonable limits. ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome this opportunity.

7-14 Reporting Safety Defects To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Reporting Safety Defects to the Administrator, NHTSA United States Government 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington D.C., 20590 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which You can also obtain other information about motor could cause a crash or could cause injury or vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation. Reporting Safety Defects to If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could the Canadian Government open an investigation, and if it ﬁnds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could order a If you live in Canada, and you believe that your recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of between you, your retailer or Saturn Corporation. Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

7-15 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn Service Publications Ordering In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in Information a situation like this, please notify Saturn. Call 1-800-553-6000, or write: Service Manuals Saturn Corporation A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn 100 Saturn Parkway service manuals are written for trained technicians, and Mail Drop 371-999-S24 in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500 necessary to complete certain repairs. However, the manuals are available to owners who either have In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write: the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of Saturn Customer Communication Centre the technical aspect of their Saturn. General Motors of Canada Limited CA1-163-005 For additional publications information or to order 1908 Colonel Sam Drive publications in the United States, call toll free Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line. In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

7-16 Owner Publications Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and future costly repairs. light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or individual bulletins are also at your participating Saturn unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker retailer. You can ask to see them. way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service your vehicle better. In Canada, information relating to product service bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small retailer. number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified technician may have to determine if a specific Service Bulletins bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service saturn-publications.com to order online. bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for servicing our products better. You can get these bulletins, too.

7-17 Vehicle Data Recording and Event Data Recorders Privacy This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment computers that record information about the vehicle’s or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in performance and how it is driven. For example, understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle control engine and transmission performance, to monitor dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide is designed to record such data as: antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your • How various systems in your vehicle were operating dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety modules may also store data about how you operate the belts were buckled/fastened vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s • How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat accelerator and/or brake pedal positions, and temperature settings. • How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

7-18 Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only OnStar® if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, Conditions for information on data collection and such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR use. See also OnStar¨ System on page 2-47 in this data with the type of personally identifying data routinely manual for more information. acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Navigation System required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special system may result in the storage of destinations, equipment, can read the information if they have addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip access to the vehicle or the EDR. information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion Saturn will not access this data or share it with others instructions. except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request of police or similar Radio Frequency government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required Identiﬁcation (RFID) by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions also be used for Saturn research needs or may be made such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system available to others for research purposes, where a security, as well as in connection with conveniences need is shown and the data is not tied to a speciﬁc such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and vehicle or vehicle owner. starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other Saturn system containing personal information.

7-19 ✍ NOTES

7-20 Appearance Care A Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ...... 5-106 Accessories and Modifications ...... 5-3 Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-103 Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-21 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-107 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-104 Vehicle ...... 1-78 Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-102 Additives, Fuel ...... 5-6 Finish Care ...... 5-104 Add-On Electrical Equipment ...... 5-110 Finish Damage ...... 5-107 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 5-18 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Air Conditioning ...... 3-23, 3-26 Surfaces ...... 5-103 Airbag Interior Cleaning ...... 5-100 Passenger Status Indicator ...... 3-41 Leather ...... 5-102 Readiness Light ...... 3-40 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-107 Airbag System ...... 1-64 Tires ...... 5-106 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-107 Vehicle ...... 1-78 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...... 5-108 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...... 1-71 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-104 Passenger Sensing System ...... 1-73 Weatherstrips ...... 5-103 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-78 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-105 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...... 1-71 Appointments, Scheduling Service ...... 7-10 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-72 Assist Handles ...... 2-57 When Should an Airbag Inflate? ...... 1-69 Audio System ...... 3-82 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 1-66 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...... 3-126 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-43 Navigation/Radio System, All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ...... 4-9 see Navigation Manual ...... 3-115 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...... 4-5 Radio Reception ...... 3-127 Anti-lock Brake, System Warning Light ...... 3-46

1 Audio System (cont.) Bulb Replacement (cont.) Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 3-124 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-47 Setting the Clock ...... 3-84 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-126 Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-46 Audio System(s) ...... 3-86 Buying New Tires ...... 5-65 Automatic Transmission Fluid ...... 5-20 Operation ...... 2-30 C Calibration ...... 2-39 California Fuel ...... 5-6 B California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...... 5-4 Battery ...... 5-37 California Proposition 65 Warning ...... 5-4 Electric Power Management ...... 3-20 Canadian Owners ...... ii Run-Down Protection ...... 3-21 Capacities and Speciﬁcations ...... 5-120 Brake Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-14, 2-37, 4-17 Emergencies ...... 4-6 Care of Brakes ...... 5-34 Safety Belts ...... 5-103 System Warning Light ...... 3-45 Cargo Cover ...... 2-59 Braking ...... 4-4 Cargo Management System ...... 2-59 Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-6 Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-59 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-25 CD, MP3 ...... 3-104, 3-108 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-45 Center Console Storage Area ...... 2-56 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-45 Chains, Tire ...... 5-71 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-44 Charging System Light ...... 3-43 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 5-45 Check License Plate Lamps ...... 5-47 Engine Light ...... 3-48

2 Checking Things Under the Hood ...... 5-11 Climate Control System ...... 3-23 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-107 Dual Automatic ...... 3-26 Child Restraints Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-34 Child Restraint Systems ...... 1-45 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-34 Infants and Young Children ...... 1-42 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System, Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ...... 1-49 Electronic ...... 3-36 Older Children ...... 1-39 Clock, Setting ...... 3-84 Securing a Child Restraint in a Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-12 Rear Seat Position ...... 1-57 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-100 Securing a Child Restraint in the Compass ...... 2-39 Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-60 Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ...... 5-73 Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-48 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-22 Cleaning Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ...... 5-106 Convenience Net ...... 2-58 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-104 Coolant Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-102 Engine ...... 5-20 Finish Care ...... 5-104 Engine Temperature Gage ...... 3-47 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Engine Temperature Warning Light ...... 3-47 Surfaces ...... 5-103 Cooling System ...... 5-26 Interior ...... 5-100 Courtesy Lamps ...... 3-17 Leather ...... 5-102 Cruise Control ...... 3-12 Tires ...... 5-106 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-52 Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-107 Cupholders ...... 2-55 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-104 Customer Assistance Information Weatherstrips ...... 5-103 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-10 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-105 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ...... 7-6

3 Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Dome Lamps ...... 3-18 Customer Assistance Offices ...... 7-6 Door Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 7-2 Delayed Locking ...... 2-11 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 7-7 Locks ...... 2-10 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ...... 7-16 Power Door Locks ...... 2-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the Programmable Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-11 Canadian Government ...... 7-15 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-12 Reporting Safety Defects to the Driver United States Government ...... 7-15 Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 Roadside Assistance Program ...... 7-7 Driver Information Center (DIC) ...... 3-54 Service Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-16 DIC Operation and Displays ...... 3-54, 3-60 DIC Vehicle Customization ...... 3-74 DIC Warnings and Messages ...... 3-64 D Driving At Night ...... 4-14 Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp Before a Long Trip ...... 4-16 System ...... 3-16 Defensive ...... 4-2 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Drunken ...... 4-2 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 3-19 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-16 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 3-19 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-16 Delayed Headlamps ...... 3-16 In Rain and on Wet Roads ...... 4-14 Delayed Locking ...... 2-11 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ...... 4-22 Diesel Winter ...... 4-17 Running Out of Fuel ...... 2-38 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...... 3-26 Disc, MP3 ...... 3-104, 3-108 DVD Doing Your Own Service Work ...... 5-4 Rear Seat Entertainment System ...... 3-115 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-18

4 Engine (cont.) E Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 5-25 EDR ...... 7-18 Overheating ...... 5-23 Electrical System Starting ...... 2-27 Add-On Equipment ...... 5-110 Entry Lighting ...... 3-18 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 5-111 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-18 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...... 5-111 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 1-38 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-111 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-15 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-115 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...... 5-110 Electronic Immobilizer F PASS-Key® III+ ...... 2-23 Electronic Immobilizer Operation Filter PASS-Key® III+ ...... 2-24 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 5-18 Engine Finish Damage ...... 5-107 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-18 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 3-6 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ...... 3-48 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-10 Coolant ...... 5-20 Flat Tire ...... 5-72 Coolant Heater ...... 2-29 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 5-84 Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 3-47 Flat Tire, Storing ...... 5-96 Coolant Temperature Warning Light ...... 3-47 Floor Mats ...... 2-57 Drive Belt Routing ...... 6-14 Fluid Engine Compartment Overview ...... 5-12 Automatic Transmission ...... 5-20 Exhaust ...... 2-37 Power Steering ...... 5-32 Oil ...... 5-13 Windshield Washer ...... 5-33 Oil Life System ...... 5-16 Fog Lamp Fog ...... 3-17

5 Fog Lamp Light ...... 3-52 Gasoline Fuel ...... 5-5 Octane ...... 5-5 Additives ...... 5-6 Speciﬁcations ...... 5-6 California Fuel ...... 5-6 Glove Box ...... 2-55 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ...... 5-10 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 7-7 Filling the Tank ...... 5-8 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...... 5-7 Gage ...... 3-53 H Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-6 Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 5-6 Head Restraints ...... 1-11 Running Out of ...... 2-38 Headlamp Fuses Aiming ...... 5-44 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 5-111 Headlamps Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...... 5-111 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-45 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-115 Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp Windshield Wiper ...... 5-110 System ...... 3-16 Delayed ...... 3-16 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-15 G Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-10 Gage Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-45 Engine Coolant Temperature ...... 3-47 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 5-45 Fuel ...... 3-53 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 3-9 Speedometer ...... 3-39 Heated Seats ...... 1-5 Tachometer ...... 3-39 Heater ...... 3-23 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-44 Engine Coolant ...... 2-29 Garage Door Opener ...... 2-50 Heater ...... 3-26

6 Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ...... 1-3 High Voltage Devices and Wiring ...... 5-110 K Highbeam On Light ...... 3-52 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-4 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-16 Keys ...... 2-3 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-16 Hood Checking Things Under ...... 5-11 L Release ...... 5-11 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 5-50 Horn ...... 3-7 Lamps How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 1-23 Courtesy ...... 3-17 Dome ...... 3-18 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-18 I Reading ...... 3-20 Ignition Positions ...... 2-26 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-32 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...... 1-42 LATCH System Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-56 Child Restraints ...... 1-49 Inﬂator Kit, Tire ...... 5-73 License Plate Lamps ...... 5-47 Instrument Panel Liftgate Brightness ...... 3-17 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-13 Cluster ...... 3-38 Liftgate, Power ...... 2-14 Overview ...... 3-4 Light Storage Area ...... 2-55 Airbag Readiness ...... 3-40 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning ...... 3-46 Brake System Warning ...... 3-45 J Charging System ...... 3-43 Cruise Control ...... 3-52 Jump Starting ...... 5-38 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ...... 3-47

7 Light (cont.) Loss of Control ...... 4-12 Fog Lamp ...... 3-52 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-58 Highbeam On ...... 3-52 Lumbar Malfunction Indicator ...... 3-48 Manual Controls ...... 1-4 Oil Pressure ...... 3-51 Power Controls ...... 1-5 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...... 3-41 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-39 Security ...... 3-51 M StabiliTrak® Indicator ...... 3-46 Maintenance Schedule Tire Pressure ...... 3-48 Additional Required Services ...... 6-6 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 3-52 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-8 Lighting At Least Once a Month ...... 6-9 Delayed Entry ...... 3-19 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-9 Delayed Exit ...... 3-19 Introduction ...... 6-2 Entry ...... 3-18 Maintenance Footnotes ...... 6-7 Parade Dimming ...... 3-19 Maintenance Record ...... 6-15 Lights Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 6-13 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-15 Maintenance Requirements ...... 6-2 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-10 Owner Checks and Services ...... 6-8 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 3-9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 6-11 Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-22 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-4 Lockout Protection ...... 2-12 Using ...... 6-2 Locks Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 Delayed Locking ...... 2-11 Malfunction Indicator Light ...... 3-48 Door ...... 2-10 Manual Lumbar Controls ...... 1-4 Lockout Protection ...... 2-12 Manual Seats ...... 1-2 Power Door ...... 2-11 Manual, Using ...... iii Programmable Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-11 Memory Seat and Mirrors ...... 1-6 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-12

8 Message Oil, Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-16 DIC Warnings and Messages ...... 3-64 Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-39 Mirrors Online Owner Center ...... 7-5 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® OnStar, Privacy ...... 7-19 and Compass ...... 2-39 OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ...... 2-47 Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 2-39 Operation, Universal Home Remote System ...... 2-51 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-43 Orange Covered Wiring ...... 5-110 Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-43 Other Warning Devices ...... 3-7 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ...... 2-42 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-34 Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-41 Outlets MP3 ...... 3-104, 3-108 Accessory Power ...... 3-21 MyGMLink.com ...... 7-5 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-43 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-43 N Power Foldaway Mirrors ...... 2-42 Power Mirrors ...... 2-41 Navigation System, Privacy ...... 7-19 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-25 Navigation/Radio System, Owner Checks and Services ...... 6-8 see Navigation Manual ...... 3-115 Owners, Canadian ...... ii New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-25 P O Paint, Damage ...... 5-107 Odometer ...... 3-39 Parade Dimming ...... 3-19 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-12 Park Oil Shifting Into ...... 2-35 Engine ...... 5-13 Shifting Out of ...... 2-36 Pressure Light ...... 3-51 Park Aid ...... 2-44, 2-46

9 Park Brake ...... 2-34 Parking R Assist ...... 2-44 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 5-23 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-37 Radio Frequency Identiﬁcation (RFID), Privacy ...... 7-19 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...... 3-41 Radio(s) ...... 3-86 Passenger Sensing System ...... 1-73 Radios Passing ...... 4-12 Navigation/Radio System, PASS-KEY® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ...... 2-23 see Navigation Manual ...... 3-115 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Rear Seat Audio ...... 3-124 Operation ...... 2-24 Reception ...... 3-127 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4 Setting the Clock ...... 3-84 Power Theft-Deterrent ...... 3-126 Door Locks ...... 2-11 Reading Lamps ...... 3-20 Electrical System ...... 5-111 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-34 Liftgate ...... 2-14 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Lumbar Controls ...... 1-5 Electronic Climate Controls ...... 3-36 Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ...... 3-22 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-12 Retained Accessory (RAP) ...... 2-27 Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-58 Seat ...... 1-3 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 3-124 Steering Fluid ...... 5-32 Rear Seat Entertainment System ...... 3-115 Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ...... 3-8 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-12 Windows ...... 2-19 Rear Vision Camera ...... 2-46 Privacy ...... 7-18 Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ...... 3-11 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-18 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with Navigation System ...... 7-19 OnStar® and Compass ...... 2-39 OnStar ...... 7-19 Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 2-39 Radio Frequency Identiﬁcation ...... 7-19 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-8 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-11

10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 6-11 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...... 4-27 S Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ...... 2-4 Safety Belt Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Reminder Light ...... 3-39 Operation ...... 2-5 Safety Belts Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-7 Care of ...... 5-103 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 1-23 Spare Tire ...... 5-88 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-32 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-85 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-38 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-47 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-38 Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...... 6-13 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ...... 1-18 Reporting Safety Defects Safety Warnings and Symbols ...... iii Canadian Government ...... 7-15 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-4 Saturn ...... 7-16 Seats United States Government ...... 7-15 Driver Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 Restraint System Check Head Restraints ...... 1-11 Checking the Restraint Systems ...... 1-80 Heated Seats ...... 1-5 Replacing Restraint System Parts Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 After a Crash ...... 1-81 Memory, Mirrors ...... 1-6 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...... 2-27 Power Lumbar ...... 1-5 Roadside Power Seats ...... 1-3 Assistance Program ...... 7-7 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-12 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ...... 4-22 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-8 Routing, Engine Drive Belt ...... 6-14 Third Row Seat ...... 1-14 Running Out of Fuel ...... 2-38 Second Row Center Console ...... 2-56 Secondary Latch System ...... 5-93

11 Securing a Child Restraint Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-7 Rear Seat Position ...... 1-57 Starting the Engine ...... 2-27 Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-60 Steering ...... 4-9 Security Light ...... 3-51 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ...... 3-126 Service ...... 5-3 Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and Accessories and Modiﬁcations ...... 5-3 Telescopic Steering Column ...... 3-8 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic ...... 3-7 Vehicle ...... 5-5 Storage Areas California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ..... 5-4 Cargo Management System ...... 2-59 California Proposition 65 Warning ...... 5-4 Center Console Storage Area ...... 2-56 Doing Your Own Work ...... 5-4 Convenience Net ...... 2-58 Engine Soon Light ...... 3-48 Cupholders ...... 2-55 Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-16 Glove Box ...... 2-55 Service, Scheduling Appointments ...... 7-10 Instrument Panel Storage Area ...... 2-55 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-78 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-58 Setting the Clock ...... 3-84 Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-58 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-107 Second Row Center Console ...... 2-56 Shifting Into Park ...... 2-35 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...... 4-21 Shifting Out of Park ...... 2-36 Sun Visors ...... 2-21 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change ...... 3-9 Sunroof ...... 2-60 Spare Tire Compact ...... 5-100 Installing ...... 5-88 T Removing ...... 5-85 Tachometer ...... 3-39 Storing ...... 5-96 Taillamps Speciﬁcations, Capacities ...... 5-120 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Speedometer ...... 3-39 Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-46 ® StabiliTrak Indicator Light ...... 3-46 Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-8 ® Stabilitrak System ...... 4-6 Telescopic Wheel ...... 3-7

12 Theft-Deterrent, Radio ...... 3-126 Tires (cont.) Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-21 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 5-73 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-22 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-50 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ...... 2-23 Tire Terminology and Deﬁnitions ...... 5-53 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 5-68 Operation ...... 2-24 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 5-70 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-7 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-70 Time, Setting ...... 3-84 When It Is Time for New Tires ...... 5-64 Tire Tow/Haul Mode ...... 2-33 Pressure Light ...... 3-48 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 3-52 Tires ...... 5-49 Towing Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Recreational Vehicle ...... 4-27 Cleaning ...... 5-106 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-31 Buying New Tires ...... 5-65 Your Vehicle ...... 4-27 Chains ...... 5-71 Traction Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-84 Stabilitrak® System ...... 4-6 Cleaning ...... 5-106 Transmission Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-100 Fluid, Automatic ...... 5-20 Different Size ...... 5-67 Transmission Operation, Automatic ...... 2-30 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-72 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 3-9 Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-56 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ...... 3-8 Inspection and Rotation ...... 5-63 Installing the Spare Tire ...... 5-88 Pressure Monitor Operation ...... 5-59 U Pressure Monitor System ...... 5-58 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 2-44 Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-88 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 5-68 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-85 Universal Home Remote System ...... 2-50 Secondary Latch System ...... 5-93 Operation ...... 2-51 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-96 Using this Manual ...... iii

13 Wheels V Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 5-70 Vehicle Different Size ...... 5-67 Control ...... 4-3 Replacement ...... 5-70 Damage Warnings ...... iv Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-48 Loading ...... 4-22 Windows ...... 2-18 Symbols ...... iv Power ...... 2-19 Vehicle Customization, DIC ...... 3-74 Windshield Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ...... 7-18 Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ...... 5-105 Vehicle Identiﬁcation Washer ...... 3-10 Number (VIN) ...... 5-109 Washer Fluid ...... 5-33 Service Parts Identiﬁcation Label ...... 5-109 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 5-48 Vehicle, Remote Start ...... 2-7 Wiper Fuses ...... 5-110 Ventilation Adjustment ...... 3-34 Wipers ...... 3-10 Visors ...... 2-21 Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ...... 3-11 Voltage Devices, High and Wiring ...... 5-110 Winter Driving ...... 4-17 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-44 Wiring, High Voltage Devices ...... 5-110 W X Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ...... 3-37 XM Radio Messages ...... 3-114 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages ...... 3-64 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-6 Y Other Warning Devices ...... 3-7 Safety and Symbols ...... iii Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 Vehicle Damage ...... iv